Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive

This category describes how to use the Send/Fax function.



What This Machine Can Do

All the elements you will ever need in a digital multitasking machine.

The iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is packed with various send functions.

Equipped with features that meet the needs of document work in a digitized office, the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 represents the ultimate in digital multitasking machines.

  • Diverse Sending Methods

You can easily scan paper documents and send them to one or multiple recipients via fax, e-mail, or I-fax, bringing to your work environment increased efficiency in the arena of document exchange. The ability to send documents to FTP, SMB, NetWare, and WebDAV file servers also serves to help digitize paper documents for convenient data access and management.

  • Sending documents through e-mail or I-fax is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated. Sending documents to a file server or an inbox is also available.
  • Sending documents via fax is available only if the optional fax board is installed. Sending documents to an inbox is also available.
  • Super G3 Fax Function

This machine's Super G3 fax function is compatible with most Super G3 fax machines used in office environments. Compared to ordinary fax machines, Super G3 enables high-speed fax transmissions, thus reducing transmission costs. You can add an additional line if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Increased Security with Subaddress Transmission

This machine's fax function is compatible with ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddress features. As long as the remote party's fax machine supports subaddress fax transmissions, you can send or receive documents with increased security by attaching a subaddress and a password to all of your fax transactions.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • ECM Function for High Quality Images

This machine's fax function is compatible with ECM (Error Correction Mode). ECM corrects errors and distorted or poor quality fax transmissions that arise from line noise. It also enables you to send or receive high-quality faxes even if the condition of your telephone line is not ideal.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • File Formats for Every Need

You can send documents in a variety of file formats, including TIFF, JPEG, PDF, and XPS. This gives you the freedom to send documents in a manner that is best suited to the purpose of the document, as well as the recipient's document handling environment.

  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Flexible Scan Features

This machine offers a variety of convenient scanning features, such as the scanning of two-sided and book originals, as well as the ability to merge and send documents that are scanned separately. You can also set the exposure, color mode, and document size to match the type of original that you are scanning. In addition, you can store preferred scan settings and retrieve them at any time.

  • Preview Function

The Preview function enables you to check the contents of documents before sending them. This is useful in preventing mistakes.

  • Instant Address Search with LDAP

You can search for addresses stored on LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers on the network and use them as recipients for send jobs or store them in the Address Book.

  • Receiving Faxes/I-Faxes in Memory

Received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed. You can check the sender information and the number of pages that each document contains before printing it or forwarding it to another destination.

  • Receiving I-faxes in memory is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Receiving faxes in memory is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Automatic Forwarding

The machine can be set to automatically forward received fax/I-fax documents that match the specified forwarding conditions to any destination using the desired send settings. You can forward fax/I-fax documents to other machines (relay function) or store received documents that are confidential in Confidential Fax Inboxes. Automatic forwarding can be set to activate at a specified time. Since received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination, this function can be used to sort and deliver received fax/I-fax documents to the appropriate destinations.

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail and I-fax documents can also be forwarded, and file servers can be specified as forwarding destinations.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, the machine can receive faxes and forward received fax documents to fax machines.


Overview of the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225

If you press [Send], the Send Basic Features screen appears. The Send function enables you to scan documents and send them to specified destinations via fax, e-mail, or I-fax, save them to a file server, or store them in an inbox to process them at a later date. You can also send documents to multiple destinations simultaneously using various sending methods, such as e-mail and I-fax.

Depending on the installed or activated options, the Send Basic Features screen is displayed as follows:


If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, it is displayed as [Send].


If only the fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Fax].


If the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Send].

Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:

  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed

The Flow of the sending is as follows.


Remark
  • Network settings must be specified to be able to send scanned documents to an e-mail address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See "Network.")

  • Send Basic Features Screen

The screen below, which appears when [Send] is selected, is called the Send Basic Features screen.

1

Destination List
Displays a list of destinations.

9

Erase
Press to erase the destination displayed in the destination list.

2

Address Book
Press to select a destination from the Address Book.

10

Cc Bcc
Press to specify the e-mail address as a Cc or Bcc destination.

3

Network Address Book
Press to search a destination from the LDAP server.

11

Recall
Press to recall previously set send jobs, including the destinations, scan settings, and send settings.

4

Details
Press to check or change the destination information selected from the destination list.

12

2-Sided Original
Press to scan both sides of the original.

5

New Address Tab
Press to specify a destination not stored in the Address Book.

13

Different Size Originals
Press to scan differently sized originals together.

6

Favorites Tab
Press to recall the destinations and settings stored in a favorites button.

14

File Format
Press to select the file format of the document you are going to send (TIFF, JPEG, PDF, or XPS).

7

One-touch Tab
Press to recall the destinations stored in a one-touch button.

15

Send Settings
Press to set the send settings. You can specify various settings, such as setting the document to be sent at a specified time, entering a subject for an e-mail message or an I-fax, or entering the sender's name for fax.

8

Scan Settings drop-down list
Press to select the scan mode.

16

Register
Press to register new destinations in the Address Book, one-touch buttons, or favorites buttons from the Send Basic Features screen.

  • Scan Settings Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, is called the Scan Settings screen. Display this screen to set the scan settings for sending documents.

1

Color Mode drop-down list
Press to select the color mode for scanning.

7

Document Size Select
Press to select the size of the original that you want to scan.

2

Direct
Press to return the scan ratio to 100%.

8

Scan Exposure
Press [] or [] to manually adjust the scan exposure. Press [A] (Auto) to select or cancel the automatic scan exposure adjustment.

3

Copy Ratio
Press to scan originals at a different scan (zoom) ratio.

9

Original Type drop-down list
Press to select the type of original (Text/Photo, Photo, or Text) that you are going to scan. You can also select the type of photo ([Printed Image] or [Photo]) if Photo Mode in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'.

4

Scanning Mode drop-down list
Press to select a stored scan mode and resolution.

10

Special Features
Press to select and use the Special Features modes available for scanning.

5

Store/Erase
Press to store or erase a scan mode.

11

System Monitor
Press to check the status or details of a send or receive job, or to cancel a job.

6

Resolution drop-down list
Press to select the resolution.



Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine

This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must be done before the machine is used for sending operations.


Remark
  • If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly, the machine may not function properly.
  • Network settings must be specified to send scanned documents to an e-mail address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See "Network.")
  • Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:
  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed

  • Setting the Telephone Line Type

To set the type of telephone line connected to the machine with the optional fax board installed, check whether it is a rotary dial (rotary pulse) or a touch-tone type and make the correct setting. (See "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line.")

If you have added an additional line to the machine, perform the same registration procedure for the additional line, too. (See "Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line.")

  • Registering the Sending Record

The sending record is printed at the top of every document you send via I-fax or fax to the recipient.

The registered information is printed, as shown below. Depending upon the model of the machine at the receiving side, this information may appear on the display while communication is taking place.

  • Date and Time
  • The date and time of the transmission are recorded.
  • I-Fax Address or Fax Number
  • Your machine's I-fax address or fax number is recorded.
  • Sender's Name (TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification))
  • For fax documents, the name registered as the sender's name is recorded.
  • Destination Name
  • If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored destination's name appears on the sending record. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • Page Number
  • The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.

Remark
  • You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed.
  • If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper, and not all of the items are registered, only the required registered items and the total number of original pages are printed.
  • To print the destination's name on the recipient's paper, set Display Destination Name in TX Terminal ID in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'.
  • You can select the login user's name as the sender's name if a MEAP login service is being used. (The login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI).) For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

  • Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can add an additional line. A dual or triple line can reduce the time it takes to send and receive documents. It is necessary to register a separate telephone number for the additional line. (See "Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line.")

Line 1 (the standard line): The optional fax board is installed.

Line 2 (the additional line): The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is also installed.

Line 3 (the additional line): The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is also installed.



Setting the Display Language

If you decide to switch the display language, set Language Switch to 'On' before entering characters.

If Language Switch is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after entering characters, the characters may not be displayed correctly. In this case, either re-enter the characters after setting Language Switch to 'On', or enter characters with Language Switch set to 'Off'.

If Language Switch is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. (See "Additional Functions.")



Selecting the Type of Telephone Line

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.

If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Tel Line Type].
  1. Select the type of telephone line → press [OK].

If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.



Setting the Current Date and Time

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  • GMT:
GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
  • Time Zone:
Time Zone: The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.
  • Daylight Saving Time:
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The period in which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time."

Remark
  • You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network from the Additional Functions screen. (See "Network.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Date & Time Settings].

  1. Enter the current date (day, month, year) and time using - (numeric keys).

Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).

Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) without a space.

Examples:

May 6 → 0605
7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

  • Press the Time Zone drop-down list → select the time zone where the machine is located.

  • Press [On] → [Start Date].
  • Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively.
  • Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take effect → [OK].
  • Press [End Date] → select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving Time ends → [OK].
  • If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.

  1. Press [OK].


Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

You must store your machine's fax number. This number is printed on the document that you fax to the receiving party.

The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine, depending on their type of machine.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Unit Telephone #].

  1. Enter the unit's telephone number using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Space]: Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.


Registering Sender Names

For fax, you can register any name as the sender's name, such as the section or department's name, or an individual's name.

The registered sender's name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine and/or printed at the top of the documents that you send as the sender's information.


Remark
  • You can set to display and print the sender's name instead of the name stored as the unit's name with the Sender's Names setting from the Send Settings screen. (See "Sending a Fax.")
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Basic Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Sender's Names (TTI)].
  1. Select the number under which you want to register the sender's name → press [Register/Edit].

You can store up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).

To delete a stored sender's name, select the number under which the name is registered → press [Erase]. Only one sender name can be erased at a time.

If logging in using SSO-H, the login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI). In this case, you can register, edit, or delete the sender's name in <99>. For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

  1. Enter the sender's name → press [OK].


Registering the Unit's Name

Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a department name is optional).

For example:

  • Your name: John Smith
  • Company name: Canon
  • Company name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.

When you send a document via e-mail, fax, or I-fax, the unit name that you registered is displayed or printed as the sender's name at the recipient's machine.

Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during transmission.



Registering the Unit's Name for Fax

You can register the unit name for fax documents.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.
  • The unit name can be printed in the TX Terminal ID.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Unit Name].
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].


Registering the Unit's Name for E-Mail/I-Fax

You can register the unit name for e-mail and I-fax documents.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional Color Universal Send Kit is necessary to be activated.
  • If the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service and you are sending an e-mail message:
  • The e-mail address of the login user registered for the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is displayed in the From field on the e-mail recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail address registered in the Device Information settings for this machine. (See "Sending an E-Mail Message.")
  • If the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service and you are sending an I-fax:
  • The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field on the I-fax recipient's machine, and the e-mail address of the login user registered for the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is displayed in the Sender field. (See "Sending an I-Fax.")
  • If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are sending an e-mail message:
  • The e-mail address that you registered for Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine. (See "Sending an E-Mail Message.")
  • If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are sending an I-fax:
  • The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field, and the e-mail address that you registered for Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is displayed in the Sender field on the recipient's machine. (See "Sending an I-Fax.")
  • If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine, regardless of the login services. If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine.
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Unit Name for E-Mail/I-Fax] under <Common Settings>.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].


Flow of Sending Operations

This section describes the flow of basic sending operations.


Remark
  • Before using the Send function, it is useful to read the following topics:
  • For instructions on entering characters using the keys displayed on the touch panel display, see "Basic Operations."
  • The maximum number of send jobs that the machine can handle is 120, including jobs with error codes. Among these, 64 fax jobs can be handled. However, the actual number of send jobs that the machine can handle may be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
  • Multiple documents are being sent at the same time
  • Large documents are being sent
  • A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
  • If you are using a login service, it is necessary to log in to the machine with the appropriate procedure for the login service you are using.
  • If you are using the optional Card Reader-C1 to perform Department ID Management, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Press [Send].


The Send Basic Features Screen

The function key for the sending and fax functions on top of the basic features screen varies, depending on the activated or installed options, as follows:

  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, it is displayed as [Send].
  • If only the optional fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Fax].
  • If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Send].
  1. Place your originals.


  1. Specify the destinations.
  • Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:
  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed
  • A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
  • : Group
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Inbox
  • : Fax
  • : Cc
  • : Bcc


  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.



  • Press [Network Add.Book] → search through the directory listing on the server (LDAP) to specify the destination. (See "Using a Server.")

  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.

  • Only e-mail addresses can be specified as Cc and Bcc addresses.
  • The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is 64, including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count). Group addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → select a scan setting.

If the desired scan setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll through the list.

To change the Scan mode settings, select [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, and adjust the settings. (See "Scan Settings.")

  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes.")
  • If the originals contain few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the originals are close to black
  • To set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale] when resolution is set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine. If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], the resolution cannot be set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi.
  1. Press [File Format] → select a file format for sending your document.

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the destination
  • A User Inbox is specified as the destination
  • The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
  • : Divide into Pages
  • : Trace & Smooth
  • : Compact
  • : OCR (Text Searchable)
  • : Encrypt
  • : Add Digital Signatures
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify the send settings.

Specify the Delayed Send, Job Done Notice, Preview, Stamp, and Direct Sending modes, as necessary.

  • For instructions on setting the Direct Sending mode, see "Sending a Fax."
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press (Start).

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display → press (Start).

When scanning is complete, press [Done].

If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] → try scanning the original again from the first page. Scanning may be possible if you set 'Low' for Sharpness, and 'Text' for the type of original.

Scanning starts.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

  • The size of the original is detected automatically. However, if the output paper in the recipient's machine is not equal to the scanned document size, the original image may be reduced in size to match it.
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  1. If you want to cancel sending, press (Stop).
  • You can press (Stop) to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
  1. When scanning is complete, remove your originals.


Sending Fax Documents Manually

This mode enables you to manually send fax documents after checking that the destination is ready to receive fax transmissions.


Remark
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, manual sending can only be used for line 1.
  • To send documents consisting of two or more sheets, an optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is required. You can only send one page at a time when you place your originals on the platen glass.
  • If you cancel manual sending during transmission, the pages that have already been scanned are sent. You can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing a Fax Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor screen.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Make sure that the machine is ready to send.

  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].

  1. Press [On-hook].


  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

  • Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.

  • Press [One-touch Buttons] → select the desired one-touch button → press [OK].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-touch Button Number) → enter the number for the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).


  1. Make sure that you hear the other party or carrier signal (a high-pitched tone).

The level of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [] or [].

You can enter an extension number after dialing the fax number.

  • You can change the scan settings before sending your document.
  • To cancel Manual Sending, press [End].
  1. Press (Start).

Scanning starts and the document is sent.

During the transmission, the transaction number, destination's telephone number, and page number are displayed in the message area.



Canceling a Job

You can cancel a send job using the touch panel display, System Monitor screen, or by pressing (Stop) on the control panel.



Using the Touch Panel Display

You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being scanned.


  1. Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is scanning.

  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job → press [Yes].

The send job is canceled.

  1. Remove your originals.


Using the Stop Key

You can cancel a send job by pressing (Stop), while the job is being scanned.


Remark
  • You can press (Stop) only to cancel a send job that is being scanned.

  1. Press (Stop).
  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job → press [Yes].

The send job is canceled.

  1. Remove your originals.


Using the System Monitor Screen

You can cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being sent.



E-mail, I-Fax, Sending to a File Server, or Storing in a User Inbox

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send].

  1. Press [Status] → select the send job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel].

  1. Press [Yes].
  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.


Fax

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Fax].

  1. Press [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status] → select the fax job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel].


  1. Press [Yes].

  • Verify the destinations of the fax job, press [Cancel All] or [Cancel Current Job].

If you do not want to cancel any job of the Sequential Broadcast, press [Cancel].

  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.


Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab

You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax address, or file server address) to send documents. This section describes the procedure for specifying destination that has not been stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.
  • If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User Inbox.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and a User Inbox.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].


Specifying a Fax Number

You can specify a new fax number using - (numeric keys), , and . You can also specify several numbers in succession, and send the original to several destinations in a single operation (Sequential Broadcast).


  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].
  • If no destination is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen, pressing - (numeric keys), , or without pressing [Fax] on the New Address tab, displays the screen shown in step 2, which enables you to enter the fax number.

  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
[Direct]: Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not select Direct Sending, Memory Sending is used. (See "Sending a Fax.")
[Next]: Press to specify another destination after specifying the first destination using the numeric keys.
[Option]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. Press to set an optional subaddress and password.
[On-hook]: Press to use tone dialing or to send a fax document manually. (See "Fax Information Services.")
  • You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

  • Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.
  • Select [Line 1], [Line 2], [Line 3], or [Auto] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Line 1]: Standard line (The optional fax board is installed)
[Line 2]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Line 3]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Auto]: Selects the line according to the settings specified for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.

  • Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and.
  • Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • Press [OK].

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.

  1. Press [OK].


Specifying an E-Mail Address

You can specify a new e-mail address. You can enter an e-mail address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.


  1. Press [New Address] → [E-mail].
  1. Press [E-mail Address].

  1. Enter the e-mail address → press [OK].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all of the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into separate pages and sent as multiple e-mail messages.
  • Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is not able to combine divided data.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying an I-Fax Address

You can specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area, I-fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You can enter an I-fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display. You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I-fax.


  1. Press [New Address] → [I-Fax].
  1. Press the Mode drop-down list → select [Simple] or [Full].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax was sent successfully.
  • In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be compatible with the Full mode.
  • If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout > in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.
  1. Press [I-Fax Address].
  1. Enter the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • If you do not send documents via a server, and the recipient's IP address is not registered on a DNS server, use the following format to enter the domain name: (user)@(the recipient's IP address).
  1. Press [Destination Conditions] → specify the receiving conditions of the destination.
  1. Select the paper size, compression method, and resolution.

The following conditions are always selected:

  • Paper Size: A4/LTR
  • Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
  • Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi

A5 is included in [A4/LTR].

  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  • Available compression methods are:
  • MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
  • MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
  • MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive Divided Data> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a sending error occurs.
  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Sends your I-fax documents via a mail server. This enables you to send documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way that you send an e-mail message.

[Off]:

Does not send your I-fax documents via a server. You can send large amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is possible before you set <Send Via Server> to 'Off'.
  • To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to 'On' on the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server> is grayed out. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying a File Server

This section describes the four procedures for specifying a file server on the network as the destination of a send job.


Remark
  • Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed. Once the limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents to a file server using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Host Name and Folder Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • Set the following items when sending to a file server:
  • Protocol
  • Host Name
  • Folder Path
  • User
  • Password
  • For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see "Network."
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, set the FTP server address specified in iW Document Manager Gateway as the destination. Using iW and the Send function of the iR enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on iW, see the appropriate iW Document Manager Gateway documentation.

  • Using the Keyboard

You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password] to specify the file server settings.

  • Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen. You can either specify a file server from a workgroup, or specify the domain name of an Active Directory Server on the machine.

  • Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))

If you select [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen.

  • Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Host Search] on the File screen.



Using the Keyboard

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select the desired server protocol.

The following server protocols may be used.

Confirm the system environment of the destination before sending.

Protocol System Requirements Application
FTP Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later, Mac OS X or later, or Red Hat Linux 7.2 -
Windows 2000 Server Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0
Windows Vista Internet Information Services 7.0
Windows(SMB) Windows 2000/XP
Windows Server 2003, or
Windows Vista
-
Mac OS X v10.2
Red Hat Linux 7.2
Samba 2.2/3.0
NetWare(IPX) Novell NetWare V.3.2 or later -
WebDAV Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, Windows 2000 Server, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003 Apache 2.0
Mac OS X Apache 1.3
Windows 2000 Professional/Server Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0

The following are the product requirements for the server that is compatible with IPv6.

Protocol System Requirements Application
FTP Solaris Version 9.0 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, or Mac OS X 10.3 or later -
WebDAV Solaris Version 9.0 or later Apache 2.0
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0
  • If you are using WebDAV and connect to the Internet using proxies, the proxy server must support IPv6.
  • This machine does not support WebDAV transmissions to Windows Vista. However, it is possible to view documents sent to the WebDAV server on the network from Windows Vista.
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

If you select [Windows (SMB)] or [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify the file server by pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using the Browse key, see "Specifying a File Server."

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify the file server by pressing [Host Search]. For instructions on using the Host Server key, see "Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))."

[Host Name]:

Press [Host Name] → enter a host name → press [OK].

A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to identify it on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

When [FTP] or [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, you can also specify a port number after the host name address by entering a colon (:) and the port number.

Example: 192.168.100.50:21000

When sending to an IPv6 host, specify the following settings for [Host Name].

[IPv6 Address]: <Port Number>

Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000

Make sure to enter the same port number for the Host Name as the one specified for the FTP server or WebDAV server to which you are sending your documents.

When [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, the HTTP protocol is used if you specify 'HTTP://' as the scheme at the start of the host name, and the SSL + HTTP (HTTPS) protocol is used if you specify 'HTTPS://' as the scheme at the start of the host name. Specifying 'HTTPS://' as the scheme enables SSL communications between the server and the machine. However, the route between the server and the machine is only encrypted, and a server certificate validity check is not performed using a CA certificate.

[Folder Path]:

Press [Folder Path] → enter a folder path → press [OK].

A folder path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

If [Windows (SMB)] is selected as the server protocol, enter the required user name information in the manner shown below:

  • To enter the user name only
    Example: user_name
    Maximum 20 characters
  • To enter the user name and the domain name
    Example: domain_name\user_name
    Domain name: Maximum 15 characters
    User name: Maximum 20 characters
  • To enter a UPN (User Principal Name)
    Example: user_name@domain_name.com
    Maximum 128 characters

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Setting the password is optional.

After pressing [OK], the password appears as asterisks (********) on the File settings screen.

  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the folder name set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the user name set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • UPN (User Principal Name) can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the password set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • When sending to a file server on the Internet using WebDAV, proxy server settings may be required, depending on the environment of the destination. Specify the host name (or IP address), port number, user name, and password for the proxy server in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."


Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [Windows (SMB)].

  1. Press [Browse].
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Network.")

  1. Select the desired workgroup → press [Down].

You can also select the workgroup from a list of Active Directory server domain names that are registered in the machine by pressing [Directory] from the drop-down list.


  • Press [Register].
  • Enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • You can register up to five Directory servers.
  • To edit the domain name, select the domain name that you want to edit → press [Edit].
  • To delete the domain name, select the domain name that you want to delete → press [Erase] → press [Yes] on the pop-up screen that appears when you press [Erase].

  1. Select the desired file server → press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password.
  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter your user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter your network password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  1. Press [Down] → select the folder on the specified server to which you want to send your documents → press [OK].

To go down one level, press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [NetWare (IPX)].

  1. Press [Browse].
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Network.")
  1. Press the drop-down list → select [NDS] or [Bindery] from the drop-down list.

Details of each item are shown below.

[NDS]: NDS (Novell Directory Service) is a directory service that manages user and server names. Select [NDS] when you are using Novell NetWare V.4.x or later.
[Bindery]: One of the directory services provided by Novell for managing the information of user and server names. Select [Bindery] when you are using Novell NetWare V.3.x.

If you select [Bindery], follow the procedure from step 5 in "Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))."

If you select [NDS], follow the steps below.

  1. Select the desired NDS tree → press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Select a folder on the specified server in which you want to log on to → press [Log In].

If no folder is displayed, press [Log In] to log on to the Novell server.

To go down one level, press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Enter your user name and network password.
  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter your user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter your network password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  1. Press [Down] → select the folder to where you want to send your file → press [OK].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [Windows (SMB)].

  1. Press [Host Search].
  1. Enter the search conditions → press [Start Searching].

[Workgroup]:

Press [Workgroup] → enter the workgroup name → press [OK].

[Host Name to Search]:

Press [Host Name to Search] → enter the IP address, FQDN, or NetBIOS name → press [OK].

  • When entering a NetBIOS name, you can also enter wildcard characters, such as * and ?, as part of your search.
  • When searching for the host name using wildcard characters, make sure to also enter a workgroup name.
  • Examples:
  • * (asterisk): Replaces one or more characters (up to 15 characters).
    Example: tri* → trinity, trinity1, trinity0002
  • ?: Replaces only one character.
    Example: tr?nity → trinity

  1. Select the file server from the search results.



  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Specifying a User Inbox

You can store a scanned document in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations.


Remark
  • Documents that are scanned using a paper size specified by pressing [Other Size] or [Long Strip Original] in Document Size Select, cannot be stored in a User Inbox.
  • Documents stored in a User Inbox are automatically erased after three days. However, you can change this setting. (See "Mail Box.")

  1. Press [New Address] → [Store In Usr Inbox].

  1. Select the desired User Inbox → press [OK].

User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on the Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.


  • Press [URL Send].

A message <User Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the User Inbox.

  • Only one User Inbox can be specified as the destination at a time.
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the User Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."
  • If the URL Send mode is set, and you specify a group destination that includes a User Inbox as a send destination, the error message <Cannot send when an inbox is included in the Group Address for [URL Send]. Please enter the settings again.> may be displayed.


Sending Documents to Yourself

If the SSO-H is set as the login service, you can press [Send to Myself] to specify your e-mail address (registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H) as the destination.


Remark
  • If the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service, your e-mail address registered in the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H is set as the destination.
  • If the Domain Authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing domain authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system) is set as the login service, your e-mail address registered in Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is set as the destination.

  1. Press [New Addresses] → [Send to Myself].



Specifying Registered Destinations

You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new address altogether. You can also recall the destinations and settings stored in the favorites buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.


Remark
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.


Using the Address Book

You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax address, or file server address) to send documents. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them. Addresses are stored in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Storing New Addresses.")


Remark
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Remote UI.")

  1. Press [Address Book].
  1. Select the destination → press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the result list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers.

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  • If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the Address Book screen.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")


Using the One-Touch Buttons

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons.

Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of a one-touch button.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register destinations in one-touch buttons by pressing (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons]. (See "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons.")

  1. Press [One-touch].
  1. Select the desired one-touch button.

Each one-touch button is assigned a three digit number. If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, you can press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

  • You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
  • To cancel the selected one-touch button, press the one-touch button again.


Using the Favorites Buttons

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites buttons. (See "Registering a Favorites Button.")

  1. Press [Favorites].
  1. Select the desired Favorites Button.

  • You can manually change the recalled settings from the selected favorites button before you send your documents.
  • If you press another favorites button, the settings stored in that button are recalled.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
  • If multiple destinations are stored under the selected favorites button, the destinations may not be listed in the order in which they were set.


Using a Server

You can specify a destination by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. LDAP servers are for looking up a particular piece of information, such as a user name, e-mail address, or other contact information.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • You can send to a maximum of 64 destinations at the same time, including destinations that are specified via a server.
  • The information that can be obtained through the LDAP server varies, depending on the following:
  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated: names and e-mail addresses
  • If only the optional fax board is installed: names and fax numbers
  • If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed: names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers
  • You cannot directly specify a destination that is obtained via a server as a forwarding destination. To specify the destination as a forwarding destination, you must first store it in the Address Book. (See "Addresses Obtained via a Server.")

  1. Press [Network Add.Book].
  1. Press the Server to Search drop-down list → select the desired server to search.


  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as the search criterion, and vice versa.

  • Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] → enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which you want to search → press [OK].

The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.

To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press [Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.


  • Press [Detailed Search].
  • Press the search category drop-down list → select the desired search category.

The available search categories are:

[Name]: Search by name.
[E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]: Search by fax number.
[Organization]: Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept

  • The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
  • Press the search condition drop-down list → select the desired search condition → press [Settings].

You can select from the following search conditions:

[contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[differs from]: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • Enter the search criterion → press [OK].
  • Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] → repeat step 3.

[or]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit → press [Edit] → [Settings]. To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
  • If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

  1. Press [Start Searching].

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings.")
  • If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:

  • If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.


  1. Select the desired destination from the search results → press [OK].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You can specify multiple destinations.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. If you press [Select e-mail for I-Fax], the key lights showing that this setting is turned on, and the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can sort and limit the view of the displayed addresses by using the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  • If you specify an e-mail address as an I-fax destination, the only information that can be retrieved from the server is the I-fax address. To specify settings to match the recipient's receiving conditions, press [Details] on the Send screen.
  • If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the Search Results screen.
  1. If a fax number or I-fax address is specified as the destination, read the displayed message → press [OK].


Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses

In addition to the destination for the documents, you can also set multiple e-mail address destinations for the Cc (Carbon copy) and Bcc (Blind carbon copy) addresses.


Remark
  • Only e-mail addresses can be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc]. If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses.
  • The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is 64, including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count). Group Addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  1. Press [Cc Bcc].


  1. Specify the e-mail addresses → press [Done].

Follow the procedure below to set the e-mail addresses for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server.")

  • Press [Cc] → specify the e-mail addresses.

  • Press [Bcc] → specify the e-mail addresses.

  • Press [From To/Bcc].
  • Press [To] or [Bcc] → select the desired e-mail addresses → press [OK].
  • [From To/Bcc] is displayed only if you pressed [Cc].

  • Press [From To/Cc].
  • Press [To] or [Cc] → select the desired e-mail addresses → press [OK].
  • [From To/Cc] is displayed only if you pressed [Bcc].


Checking/Changing a Destination

You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your documents.


Remark
  • Only the destinations specified using the New Address tab and destinations obtained via a server can be changed.
  • You cannot change multiple destinations simultaneously.

  1. Select the destination → press [Details].


  1. If necessary, check or change the destination's information.

  • Check the destination's information → press [Done].

  • Check or change the destination's information → press [OK].

Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it. (See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab.")


  • Check or change the destination's information → press [OK].

Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it. (See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab.")


  • To check the information of registered destinations in a group address, select one destination at a time → press [Details].
  • Check the destination's information → press [Done] → [Done].


Erasing a Destination

You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents.


  1. Select the destination to be erased → press [Erase].



Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key

You can register new destinations in the Address Book, one-touch buttons, and favorites buttons from the Send Basic Features and the Address Book screen.

The Register key is a shortcut key to the Register Address screen in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the One-touch Buttons screen in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the Register Favorites Button screen in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).


  1. Press [Reg.].

  1. Select the item you want to register.

You can also register a destination in the Address Book or a one-touch button by pressing [Address Book] → [Register].


  • Press [Register Address] → register the destination.

  • Press [Register One-touch Button] → register the destination in a one-touch button.

For instructions on registering addresses in a one-touch button, see "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons."


  • Press [Register Favorites Button] → register destinations and settings in a favorites button.

For instructions on registering destinations and settings in a favorites button, see "Registering a Favorites Button."



Selecting a Scan Mode

You can set the scan mode that a document is scanned in. The machine has the following preset scan modes:

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed:
    Eight scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 600 × 600 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
    Seven scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the optional fax board is installed:
    Four scan modes: Black 200 × 100 dpi,
    Black 200 × 200 dpi,
    Black 200 × 400 dpi,
    Black 400 × 400 dpi

Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes or user defined scan modes (user preset keys), according to the type of original that you are sending.


Remark
  • If only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the original is always sent in the Black-and-White mode regardless color mode settings.
  • If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a lower resolution mode.
  • You can adjust the preset scan modes and create new scan settings. However, since changed scan settings are not automatically saved, it is useful to register a new scan setting if you use it frequently. (See "User Preset Keys.")
  • You can change the settings and assigned names for the eight preset scan keys, and store them as user defined scan modes (user preset keys).
  • In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the favorites buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons.")
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → select the scan mode.

  • Specifying the scan mode again cancels the scan mode and other scan features previously set.
  • You can also select a scan mode by pressing [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list to display the Scan Settings screen → press the Scanning Mode drop-down list → select a scan mode.
  1. Press (Start).

If [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, select a scan mode from the Scanning Mode drop-down list whose Color Selection mode and resolution have been registered as one of the following combinations. If you select a combination other than those listed below, a message asking for your confirmation to change the file format appears on the screen.

  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi


Scan Settings

Remark
  • Changed scan settings are not saved. For instructions on saving settings, see "User Preset Keys."
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


2-Sided Original

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is attached.
  • The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size, Long Strip Original) or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R and B5R, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  • To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals into the feeder → specify the destination → press [2-Sided Original].

  1. Select the type of original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press (Start).


Different Size Originals

This mode enables you to scan different size originals with the same widths (A3 and A4, or B4 and B5) or different widths (A3 and B4, or A4 and B5), together as one group by setting them in the feeder.


Remark
  • The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size or Long Strip Original), 2-Page Separation, Original Frame Erase, or Book Frame Erase mode.
  • The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • If Document Size Select setting is set to anything other than [Auto], all of the originals are scanned in the specified size. If you want to scan the originals in their original sizes, make sure to set Document Size Select to [Auto].
  • If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight (paper type).
  • Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths. ("Width" refers to the vertical measurement of the paper from the front of the machine to the back of the machine when the paper is placed in the feeder or on the platen glass.)
  • If you send different sized originals via fax, the paper size used to output the faxes on the recipient's machine is the size of the largest document you sent. For example, if you send an A4 and A3 original via fax, they will both be output on A3 paper at the recipient's machine.
  • Set different size originals with different widths in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
  • A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 and B5, B5 and A5
  • If you place originals with different widths into the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned as slanted.
  • If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
  • To cancel this setting, press [Diff. Size Originals] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Diff. Size Originals].

  1. Select the type of originals → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Same Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with the same width.
[Different Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with different widths.
  1. Press (Start).


Document Size

You can manually specify the document size when the machine cannot detect the paper size automatically, such as when scanning transparencies. Specify the document size as well, if you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off. You can also store the specified document size.


Remark
  • You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of these documents manually.
  • Nonstandard size originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • Original on the platen glass: Originals smaller than A5 in size
  • If you are sending a fax in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, and you place your originals into the feeder, the Document Size Select setting that you specify will be disabled.
  • If the original is placed in the feeder, you cannot scan by selecting [Other Size] in Document Size Select.
  • If you select [Long Strip Original], place your originals into the feeder. You cannot specify the size of a long strip original that is placed on the platen glass.
  • If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], a long strip originals cannot be selected. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, a long strip originals can be selected regardless of the color mode settings.
  • If you select [Other Size] in Document Size Select, you cannot select [Stamp].
  • Vertically placed B5 originals are sent as horizontal B4 documents. Horizontally placed B5 originals are sent as A4 documents.
  • If you scan a registered document size, the scanned image is not rotated automatically.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].


Specifying the Document Size

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [Document Size Select].


  1. Select the document size.

  • Select the desired document size.

  • To select an inch size, press [Inch-size].
  • If you want to scan originals longer than the standard sizes, press [Long Strip Originals]. The maximum length of originals that you can scan is 630 mm. The length of standard size originals is as follows:
  • A4: 297 mm
  • B4: 364 mm
  • A3: 420 mm

  • Press [Other Size].
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].


The Platen Glass

  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [Other Size].
  • Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] → press [OK].
  • The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is registered.

  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Registering the Specified Document Size

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Document Size Select].

  1. Press [Other Size].

  1. Press [Register Size].

  1. Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] → enter the document size using the numeric keys on the touch panel display.
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].
  • If you register a new document size in a key that already has a document size stored in it, the new document size overwrites the previously registered document size.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].
  1. Press [Cancel] → [Done] → [Cancel].


Resolution

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.


Remark
  • The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is A3. If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, the maximum size of an image that you can send at 400 × 400 dpi resolution is A3.
  • If you are sending documents by fax, select 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi, or 400 x 400 dpi. Otherwise, the document will be sent with poor resolution.
  • If you send a long strip original at 600 × 600 dpi, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly.
  • If the optional fax board is installed but the optional Color Universal Send Kit is not activated, you cannot select 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi as the resolution.
  • To set the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi when color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when setting the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, you cannot select [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale].
  • If only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, you can set to the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi. A fax number or an I-fax original is always sent in the Black-and-White mode regardless color mode settings.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the Resolution drop-down list → select a resolution → press [OK].

If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, and you select any resolution other than [300 × 300 dpi], and then press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to change the PDF or XPS file format appears on the screen.

  1. Press (Start).


Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings

Remark
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].


Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the scan exposure → press [OK].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Original Type Selection

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning. The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the image quality.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type → adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

  • Text/Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos, such as magazines or catalogues.

  • Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).

  • Text Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. When [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if the Text mode is selected, the Image Level in Text Mode setting made in Image Level for High Compression in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "Image Level for High Compression.")


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the original type drop-down list → select the original type ([Text/Photo], [Photo], or [Text]).

  • When the Photo Mode in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you can select the type of photo ([Printed Image] or [Photo]). [Printed Image] can only be selected if the color mode is set to [Black and White]. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, [Printed Image] can be selected regardless of the color modes settings. (See "Setting the Photo Mode.")

  • Press the original type drop-down list → press [Priority Level].
  • Press [Text Priority] or [Photo Priority] to adjust the degree of priority for text or photo images → press [OK].

<Priority Level>:

[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos, with as little moiré effect as possible.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the scanning exposure → [OK].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure light, or press [] to move the indicator to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Automatic Exposure Adjustment

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the scan exposure to the level best suited to the quality of the original.


Remark
  • When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, the automatic scan adjustment mode cannot be used.
  • There are two types of automatic scan exposure adjustments. The Remove Background mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original, and the Prevent Bleeding mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages. Select the desired scan exposure adjustment mode depending on the type of original. The Remove Background mode is selected by default. (See "Image Quality Adjustment.")

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [A] → [OK].

  • An automatic scan exposure adjustment may not work with transparencies. In this case, adjust the scan exposure manually by pressing [] or [].
  1. Press (Start).


Changing the Zoom Ratio

You can set the machine to adjust the zoom ratio automatically, or you can specify the zoom ratio manually before scanning the original.


Remark
  • If you are scanning an original larger than A3, the original image may be cut off slightly in printing.
  • The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is A3. If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], documents can be sent only at a ratio of 100%. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the zoom ratio can be changed regardless of the color mode settings.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press [Cancel] on the Scan Settings screen.


Preset Zoom

The machine offers you a variety of preset zoom ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size originals to another standard record size.

  • Reduction

The available preset reduction zoom ratios are:

  • A3 → B4, A4/LTR → B5 (86%)
  • B4 → A4/LTR, B5 → A5 (81%)
  • A3 → A4/LTR, B4 → (70%)
  • A3 → B5 (61%)
  • A3 → A5 (50%)
  • Enlargement

The available preset enlargement zoom ratios are:

  • A5 → A3 (200%)
  • A4/LTR → A3, B5 → B4 (141%)
  • A4/LTR → B4, A5 → B5 (122%)
  • B4 → A3, B5 → A4/LTR (115%)

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [Copy Ratio].

  1. To reduce the original image, select a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge the original image, select a preset enlargement ratio. Following your selection, press [Done] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Zoom by Percentage

You can reduce or enlarge originals by any zoom ratio in 1% increments. Any ratio from 50% to 200% can be set. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set a zoom ratio → press [Done] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Auto Zoom

You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the original and the selected record size. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. Any zoom ratio from 50% to 200% can be set.


Remark
  • You can only select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen when the resolution is set to 300 x 300 dpi or 600 x 600 dpi.
  • When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, you cannot select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Auto] → select the record size → press [OK].

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Changing Color Modes

This machine comes with two Automatic Color Selection modes. Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) detects and distinguishes color originals from grayscale originals, while Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) detects and distinguishes color originals from black-and-white originals. Depending on the Automatic Color Selection mode that you select, the machine automatically switches between the Full Color and Grayscale modes, or between the Full Color and Black-and-White modes. You can also manually select the Full Color, Grayscale, or Black-and-White mode whenever necessary.


Remark
  • if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the original is always scanned and sent in the Black-and-White mode.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], a long strip originals cannot be selected. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, a long strip originals can be selected regardless of the color mode settings.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], only a zoom ratio of 100% can be used to send documents. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the zoom ratio can be changed regardless of the color mode settings.
  • To set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale] when the resolution is set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • The default setting is 'Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black and White)'.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

  • Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale)

If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned in the Grayscale mode.


Remark
  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Grayscale mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'.
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the original are close to black

  • Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)

If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned in the Black-and-White mode.


Remark
  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black-and-White mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'.
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the original are close to black

  • Full Color

The Full Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white. If either of the Automatic Color Selection modes is selected, originals that contain few color sections, or originals with light color densities and colors close to black may be scanned in the Grayscale or Black-and-White mode. If this happens, select the Full Color mode manually.


Remark
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Full Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.

  • Grayscale

The Grayscale mode always scans in grayscale regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.

  • Black-and-White

The Black-and-White mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the color selection drop-down list → press [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)], [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Black-and-White)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], or [Black and White] → [OK].

When [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if you specify [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] or [Black and White] as the color mode and press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to change the file format appears on the screen.

  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] even if you set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)]. If you want to send the document in the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is automatically changed to [Grayscale] even if you set the color mode to [Black and White]. If you want to send the document in the Black-and-White mode, change the file format setting to anything other than [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  1. Press (Start).


What Are Special Features?

Special features, such as the Frame Erase and Job Build modes, are modes for performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when sending a document.


Remark
  • Depending on the mode, some combinations of modes will not be available. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.

  1. Place your original on the platen glass → specify the destination.
  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].

  1. Press [Special Features].
  • Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  1. Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.

To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 4 and 5.

  1. Press (Start).

If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Scanning starts.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • For modes which have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Frame Erase
    Press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase] → [Cancel].
  • For modes which do not have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Job Build
    Press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


2-Page Separation

This mode enables you to scan facing pages in a book or bound original and record then onto separate pages.


Remark
  • The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size and Long Strip Original), 2-Sided Original, Different Size Originals, or Binding Erase mode.
  • The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [2-Page Separation].


Frame Erase

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals.

The following three Frame Erase modes are available.


Remark
  • Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • The Frame Erase mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.

  • Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned image if the original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the scanned image.

  • Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you are scanning facing pages in a book or bound original.

  • Binding Erase

This mode erases the shadows that appear on the scanned image from binding holes on originals.



Original Frame Erase

Remark
  • The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Original Frame Erase].


  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.


  • Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the original size → press [OK].
  • You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch size, press [Inch-size].


Book Frame Erase

Remark
  • The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Book Frame Erase].


  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.

  • Press [Center] and [Sides] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the size of the bound original when it is open → press [OK].
  • You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch, press [Inch-size].


Binding Erase

Remark
  • The Binding Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size and Long Strip Original) or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • If you are using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Binding Erase] → select the border where the binding holes are located.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize the original as being face up.

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [OK].


Job Build

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are sent as one document after all of the batches have been scanned.


Remark
  • The Job Build mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size or Long Strip Original) mode.
  • The Job Build mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the type of originals and the desired result.
  • You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the Document Size Select (Auto or manual) mode, scan exposure, original type, 2-Sided Original, and color mode.
  • If you place your originals into the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete.
  • The maximum number of pages that can be sent at one time is 999. When using the Job Build mode, a message appears to ask you if you want to send the job when 999 pages of originals have been scanned. If you select to send the job, the scanned 999 pages are sent. If you cancel the job, the scanned pages are not sent.
  • If you place different size originals into the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
  • If you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals and store them as two-sided documents, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original mode. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals that you scan.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).

  1. When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals → press (Start).

If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing (Start).

You can select the document size. (See "Document Size.")

You can change the scan exposure and the original type settings. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

You can change the color mode setting. (See "Changing Color Modes.")

You can change the one-sided or two-sided original setting. (See "2-Sided Original.")


  • Press [2-Sided Original].

  • Select the type of two-sided original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the type of originals that you place next.

To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

Repeat this step as necessary.

  • [2-Sided Original] is displayed only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is attached.

  1. After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].


Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, use [High] as the setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, use [Low] as the setting.

  • Low

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to produce a clearer image.

  • High

This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Sharpness].
  1. Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness → press [OK].

To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High]. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards [Low].



Image Quality Adjustment

You can adjust the scan exposure to erase the background color of the original, or prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the scanned pages.


Remark
  • If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan exposure on the Scan Settings screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic scan exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the scan exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled, and the automatic scan exposure setting is used instead.
  • The Remove Background mode cannot be used with the Prevent Bleeding mode.

  • Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.

  • Prevent Bleeding

This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the scanned pages.



Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].
  1. Press [Remove Background] → [OK].

If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine adjustments to the density of the background color.

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, press [Fine Adjustment] → press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of each color that you want to adjust → press [OK].

For example, if the background color (yellow) of the original remains, press [-] next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.

Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same level as Yellow. However, adjusting the levels of Red or Green sets Yellow back to its default level.

  • You can adjust the density of each color by pressing [-] or [+]. Press [-] to make the color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


Prevent Bleeding

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].

  1. Specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent.

Details of each item are shown below.

[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages, but light areas on the front side may not be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages, but light areas on the front side of the original are always scanned.

  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent → press [OK].

  • Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] → [Fine Adjustment].
  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent → press [OK] → [OK].
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


User Preset Keys

You can set any possible combination of scan settings and store them in a user preset key in memory. The user preset keys are available for the user to set and store, and can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used scan settings.

Once user preset keys are stored, they are displayed in the Scan Settings drop-down list, and can be selected in the same way as the preset scan modes.

The scan modes stored in preset keys vary, depending on the installed or activated options, as follows:

  • If the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the System Upgrade RAM is installed:
    Eight scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 600 × 600 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
    Seven scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the fax board is installed:
    Four scan modes: Black 200 × 100 dpi,
    Black 200 × 200 dpi,
    Black 200 × 400 dpi,
    Black 400 × 400 dpi

Remark
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when setting the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, select the Black-and-White mode.
  • The scan settings stored as user preset keys in memory are not erased, even if the main power is turned OFF.
  • You can change the settings and assign names for the preset scan keys.


Storing Scan Settings

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → specify the scan settings that you want to store.
  1. Press [Store/Erase].


  1. Select a user preset key for storing the scan settings → press [Store].

The icons that are displayed are explained below:

Icon Color Mode Resolution
Automatic Color Selection 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi,
200 × 200 dpi
Automatic Color Selection 200 × 400 dpi*2, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*2,
600 × 600 dpi*2
Full Color 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi,
200 × 200 dpi
Full Color 200 × 400 dpi*2, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*2,
600 × 600 dpi*2
Grayscale, Black-and-White*1 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi*1,
200 × 200 dpi*1
Grayscale, Black-and-White*1 200 × 400 dpi*1, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*1,
600 × 600 dpi
(Not Stored)
*1 Displayed only if the optional fax board is installed.
*2 Send only if the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can assign a name to a user preset key by pressing [Register Name].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings → press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings → press [Yes].


Naming a User Preset Key

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Store/Erase].

  1. Select a user preset key to name → press [Register Name].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name changes to P1 to P8.


Erasing Scan Settings

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Store/Erase].

  1. Select the user preset key with the scan settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


Sending Methods

You can enter the document's name, subject line, message body text, and replay-to address for document to be sent. Documents can be sent without changing any of the send settings, or you can configure them to suit your needs.

When you send a document, you can also send it at a preset time.


Remark
  • If you send an image as a TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) file to a Macintosh, the recipient may not be able to view the image correctly. In this case, send the image as a PDF file or an XPS file, or view the TIFF file with an application, such as Apple QuickTime Player.
  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server."
  • If Direct Sending mode is set to 'Off' and Preview mode is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


Sending a Fax

You can scan originals and send them as faxes. This section describes the procedure for specifying a sender's name.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Memory Sending

All of the originals to be sent are first scanned and read into memory, then sent. This means that you do not need to stay near the machine once the originals have been scanned.


Remark
  • The memory can hold a total of approximately 8,000 pages of sent and received documents.

  • Direct Sending

The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.


Remark
  • With Direct Sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
  • You can specify only one destination at a time for Direct Sending mode.
  • Memory Sending is automatically set when using Delayed Send or when multiple destinations are specified.
  • If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the Direct Sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Fax Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor screen.
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select which line to send with.

  1. Place your originals → specify the fax destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Done].

[Sender's Names (TTI)]:

Press [Sender's Names (TTI)] → select sender's name → press [OK].

The name registered under <00> is selected by default.

If an SSO-H login service is specified, the login name can be selected as the sender's name. For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

[Direct]:

You can select either the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode by pressing [Direct].

To select the Direct Sending mode, press [Direct], and the key lights.

To select the Manual Sending mode, do not press [Direct], and the key remains unlit.

You can also set Direct Sending mode on the screen for specifying a new fax destination. (See "Specifying a Fax Number.")

[Line Selection]:

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, select the line to use for sending.

  • Select [Line 1], [Line 2], [Line 3], or [Auto] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Line 1]: Standard line (The optional fax board is installed)
[Line 2]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Line 3]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Auto]: Selects the line according to the settings specified for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.
  • If logging in using SSO-H, the login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI).
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, the unit's name registered for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is displayed. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  1. Press (Start).

If you are using Direct Sending mode, it is automatically set to 'Off' after the transmission is complete.



Sending an E-Mail Message

You can scan a document and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, PDF, or XPS file.


Remark
  • If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may occur when you send an e-mail message in the following cases:
    • When a user is logged in to the machine using the SSO-H
    • When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'
    In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using the SSO-H to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in Exchange General. For more information, contact your system administrator.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the e-mail address → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify each setting → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter the name of the document that you want to send → press [OK].

[DocName OCR]:

When [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to automatically extract the first text block in the document for use as its filename. You can set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in <Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "OCR (Text Searchable) Settings.")

The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid when sending a file, will not be extracted.

If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.

The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

[Subject]:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject of the e-mail message → press [OK].

[Message]:

Press [Message] → enter a message body text → press [OK].

[Reply-to]:

Press [Reply-to] → select a reply-to address → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

The selected destination is set as the reply-to e-mail address.

[E-mail Priority]:

Press the E-mail Priority drop-down list → select a priority for your e-mail message.

  • You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "E-Mail Addresses.")
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image attached to an e-mail message, and the extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the e-mail message is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: document name_002.tif
  • If you do not set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: 1231_002.tif
  • If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings is used. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending an I-Fax

You can scan a document and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes via the Internet. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address.


Remark
  • If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may occur when you send an I-fax in the following cases:
    • When a user is logged in to the machine using the SSO-H
    • When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'
    In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using the SSO-H to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in Exchange General. For more information, contact your system administrator.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the I-fax destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter a document name → press [OK].

[Subject]:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject of your I-fax → press [OK].

[Message]:

Press [Message] → enter a message body text → press [OK].

[Reply-to]:

Press [Reply-to] → select a reply-to address → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

A Full Mode Delivery Confirmation message will be sent to the selected reply-to address also.

  • You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "E-Mail Addresses.")
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate TIFF image attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of the image attached to the I-fax is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: document name_001.tif
  • If you do not set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: 1231_001.tif
  • If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings is used. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Job to a File Server

You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. The following procedure explains how to specify the document's name and the file format of the image you are sending.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the file server's destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify a send document name → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter the document name → press [OK].

[DocName OCR]:

When [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to automatically extract the first text in the document for use as its filename. You can set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in <Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). You can set from 1 to 24 characters for this setting. (See "OCR (Text Searchable) Settings.")

The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid when sending a file, will not be extracted.

If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.

The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

  • If you use characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]" in the document name, you may not be able to send the file to file servers that run on operating systems that do not recognize such characters.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and stored in a file server. The extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document you are sending is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name, the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example:
    document name_20060410203000_00002.tif
    document name_20060410203000_00002.jpeg
    document name_20060410203000_00002.pdf
    document name_20060410203000_00002.xps
  • If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
    Example:
    document name_20060410203000.tif
    document name_20060410203000.pdf
    document name_20060410203000.xps
  • If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example:
    20060410203000_00002.tif
    20060410203000_00002.jpeg
    20060410203000_00002.pdf
    20060410203000_00002.xps
  • If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
    Example:
    20060410203000.tif
    20060410203000.pdf
    20060410203000.xps
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Job to a User Inbox

You can scan a document and store it in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations. The following procedure explains how to specify the document's name when you want to send it to a User Inbox.


Remark
  • A document stored in a User Inbox is automatically erased after three days. However, you can set the time that must elapse before the documents in an inbox are automatically erased. (See "Mail Box.")
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a User Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • It is recommended that you delete unnecessary documents or image data from the User Inboxes to make space for storing new documents.
  • For more information on User Inboxes, see "Mail Box."

  1. Place your originals → specify the desired User Inbox → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify a send document name → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter a document name → press [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Delaying a Send Job

The Delayed Send mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 120 jobs (including 64 fax jobs) for delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time
  • If large document files are being sent
  • A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
  • The number of delayed send jobs which you can reserve may also be reduced if there are other jobs with no Delayed Send settings, or if there are other factors affecting the specified destinations.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  • You can check the status, cancel, or change the destinations of documents for which a preset send time has been specified. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")
  • If multiple fax jobs reach their delayed send time simultaneously, documents are sent in the order indicated in the illustration below.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Delayed Send].

  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.

  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.
  1. Press [OK] → [Done].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel the currently set Delayed Send settings, press [Send Settings] → [Delayed Send] → [Cancel].


Job Done Notice

You can send a job done notice to a specified e-mail address to notify you when a send job is complete.


Remark
  • To send a job done notice, you need to store e-mail addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Job Done Notice].

  1. Select the destination where the job done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel this setting, press [Send Settings] → [Job Done Notice] → [Cancel].


Previewing Originals

This mode enables you to preview the scanned data of your originals and to check the page count before sending your document. You can verify the scanned data of your originals on the Preview screen.


Remark
  • The Preview mode cannot be used when sending a fax document with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Preview] → [Done].

[Preview] is lit when it is on.

[Preview] is not lit when it is off.

  1. Press (Start).
  • If the Preview key is not lit, the Preview display setting is turned off, and the Preview screen is not displayed. In this case, the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  1. Press [] or [] to specify the page that you want to verify.

  1. Select whether to erase the page.

To erase the page, press [Page Erase].

If you do not want to erase the page, proceed to step 9.


  1. Select [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively] → select the pages you want to erase.

  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the page you want to erase.

  • Press [First Page] and [Last Page] to specify the first and the last page of the range you want to erase by pressing [-] or [+].

  1. Press [Start].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Verify the images → press [Start Send].

You can press [] (reduce) or [] (enlarge) to zoom in or out.

You can press [], [], [], or [] to specify the area to display when you zoom in or out on the page.

When your image is enlarged or reduced, you can see the general location of which area you are previewing with (above the reduce and enlarge icons).

  • The number of scanned pages is displayed on the Send Process screen.


Stamping Originals

The machine can print a stamp (approximately 3 mm in diameter) on the front side of scanned and sent originals.

Vertical Placement

Horizontal Placement


Remark
  • The Stamp mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size), or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • The Stamp mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • The stamp is applied to the originals that are scanned from the feeder.

  1. Place your originals in the feeder → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  • You can also set the Stamp mode by pressing [Stamp] in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions).
  1. Press [Stamp] → [Done].

To cancel the Stamp mode, press [Stamp] again.

  1. Press (Start).


Setting the File Format to Send a Document in

You can select TIFF, JPEG, PDF, or XPS as the file format to send a document in. If you select PDF as the file format, you can also specify the Trace and Smooth, Compact, OCR (Text Searchable), Encrypt, and/or Add Digital Signatures modes.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server."
  • Specify an e-mail or file server destination.
  • If Direct Sending mode is set to 'Off' and Preview mode is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


Setting the File Format

You can send a scanned document to a file server or as an e-mail attachment. The following procedure explains how to set the file format of the sent document.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.

[File Formats]:

[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/PDF] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[TIFF/XPS Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or XPS (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/XPS] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/JPEG] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth], [Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], [Encrypt], and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format regardless of the color mode. You can also specify [Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[JPEG]: Sends the file in the JPEG format, if you select a color mode other than Black-and-White.
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format, only if you select the Black-and-White mode.

  • Press [OK].

If you select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select] or [TIFF/XPS Auto Select], the Divide into Pages mode is not available.

If you select [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select] or [JPEG], [Divide into Pages] is set to 'On'.


  • Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

You can also select the type of PDF or XPS file from <PDF Options> or <XPS Options>.

For information on the type of PDF or XPS file, see the following sections. ([Trace & Smooth] and [Encrypt] can be selected only if PDF is selected.)

  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.

  1. Press (Start).


Trace & Smooth

This mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data. The extracted outline data can be used in Adobe Illustrator. The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data, so it has less of a jagged edge when seen on a PC monitor or in print.

If you select [Trace & Smooth] as the PDF file format, [Compact] is automatically set to 'On'. You can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)]. The Trace and Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. If you select [Trace & Smooth], [PDF (Trace)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.


Remark
  • If you send a trace and smooth PDF, select any of the following combination of a color mode and resolution:
  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Long strip originals (432 mm or longer) cannot be used with the Trace & Smooth mode.
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, the machine automatically recognizes which parts of the document are text or line drawings. the machine may not recognize which parts of the scanned document are text and line drawings correctly, depending on the scanned document.
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, smoothing is only performed on the areas of the document that are correctly recognized as text.
  • The text and background of a PDF containing outline data may become misaligned or text and line drawings may not be displayed when opened in Adobe Illustrator, depending on the version of Adobe Illustrator used to open the PDF.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • The Trace & Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. If you select [Trace & Smooth], [Compact] is automatically set to 'On'.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Press [Trace & Smooth].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Trace & Smooth] is selected for the PDF file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300 × 300 dpi]. If the Color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the Color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to send the document with the resolution setting and the Color mode that you specify, change the PDF file format to anything other than [Trace & Smooth] or [Compact].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format in Standard Send Settings in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."

  1. Press .


Sending a Compact PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo originals using a higher compression ratio than normal PDF or XPS files. If you select [Compact] as the PDF or XPS file format, it is recommended that you set the original type setting to either 'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type. If you select [Compact], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen. You can also select [OCR (Text Searchable)].


Remark
  • If you send a compact PDF or XPS file, select any of the following combination of a color mode and resolution:
  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi
  • If the document is a long strip original (850 mm or longer), you cannot send a compact PDF or XPS file. (Long strip originals of up to 630 mm can be scanned using the scanning area of the machine, but long strip originals longer than 630 mm can only be received by I-fax, etc.)
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Compact].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Compact] is selected for the PDF or XPS file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300 × 300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you specify, change the PDF or XPS file format to anything other than [Compact] or [Trace & Smooth].
  • If [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format in Standard Send Settings in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Compact)], [PDF (Trace)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • If you select [Compact], you can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)] at the same time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Searchable PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) to extract data that can be recognized as text from the scanned image, and add it as a transparent layer of text to create a PDF or XPS file that is searchable.


Remark
  • PDF(OCR) or XPS(OCR) and Long Strip Original (432 mm or more) cannot be set at the same time.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [OCR (Text Searchable)].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • Even if [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is selected as the file format, text may not be detected correctly, depending on the background color, style and size of the characters in the image.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."
  • If you select [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] as the file format, and <Smart Scan> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the orientation of the original is detected, and the document is automatically rotated, if necessary, before it is sent.
  • If you select [OCR (Text Searchable)], you can also set [Compact] at the same time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.
  1. Press (Start).


Encrypting PDF Files

This mode enables you to encrypt PDF files that you send to an e-mail address or file server for enhanced security. If a password is set for a PDF file, only users who enter the correct password at the other party's machine can open, print, or change the received PDF.


Remark
  • This mode can be used only if an e-mail address or file server is specified as the destination. If a fax number, I-fax address, or inbox is specified as the destination, you cannot send the job as an encrypted PDF file.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
  • The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Press [Encrypt].

  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Encryption Level>:

Press the Encryption Level drop-down list → select [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later], [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later], or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

[Password Required to Open a Document]:

Select this key to set a password for opening the received PDF files. You can specify a password by pressing [Password to Open a Doc.].

The received encrypted PDF files cannot be opened without entering the password.

[Password to Open a Doc.]:

Press [Password to Open a Doc.] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

[Password Required to Change Permiss.]:

Select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] to set a password for printing or editing the received PDF file. When selecting this key, you can specify detailed settings, such as [Allow Printing], [Allow Changes], and [Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]. Set the password in [Permission Password].

If [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set, the received encrypted PDF files cannot be printed or edited without entering the password.

[Permission Password]:

Press [Permission Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

<Allow Printing>:



If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level

Press the Allow Printing drop-down list → select whether to allow printing of the received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]:
Printing is not allowed. Even if [Do Not Allow] is selected, the document can be printed if it is opened with the permission password if the recipient is using Adobe Acrobat 5 or earlier.
  • [Allow (Low Res. only)]:
Only low-resolution printing is allowed. ([Allow (Low Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Allow]:
Printing is allowed.

<Allow Changes>:



If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level

Press the Allow Changes drop-down list → select whether to allow changing of the received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]:
Changing of documents is not allowed.
  • [Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages]:
Inserting, deleting and rotating pages is allowed. ([Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Digital Signatures]:
Adding digital signatures is allowed. ([Add Digital Signatures] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Comments and Digital Signatures]:
Adding comments and digital signatures is allowed.
  • [Changes but Comment Add/Page Extract.]:
Changing of documents except for adding comments and extracting pages is allowed. ([Changes except Comment Add/Page Extract.] is displayed only if [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Changes but Page Extraction]:
Changing of documents except for extracting pages is allowed.

[Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]:

You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

If [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected, you can select this setting. Select this key to allow copying of images and page extraction. In addition, it also has a function for reading aloud text inside a document for the visually impaired.

If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected, [Enable Copying and Extraction of Image and Text] and [Enable Access for the Visually Impaired] are displayed and you can set these settings separately.

  • If you did not enter a password in [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission Password], enter the password in the screen that appears after pressing (Start). You can store the settings for encrypted PDF files in a favorites button. If you do not want to set a password for [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] in a favorites button, leave their text boxes blank.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall], [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] become blank.
  • You cannot set the same password for both [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password].
  • [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] are displayed as asterisks (********) on the Encrypted PDF screen.
  • Even if you set restrictions for a PDF file with [Permission Password], some of these restrictions may be ignored if the recipient opens the PDF with certain software.
  • To open or print a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To change a PDF file or to enable copying and extraction of images, Adobe Acrobat is required.
  • Adding digital signatures and comments, and the ability to insert, delete, and rotate pages are features of Adobe Acrobat.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter on the Password Required to Open a Document screen and the Permission Password screen is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")

  • Select [Password Required to Open a Document] → enter a password to open a document in [Password to Open a Doc.] → select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] → enter a password in [Permission Password].

If a password is already stored, the stored password is recalled when [Encrypt] is pressed.

  • Press [Store Password] → [Yes].
  • Passwords can only be stored if logging in using SSO-H. If SSO-H is not used when logging in, [Store Password] is not appeared.
  • One password can be stored for each user. If a password is already stored, the password is overwritten when a new password is stored.
  • If [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission Password] is left empty, the password already stored is erased.
  • If logged in using SSO-H:
  • When sending using favorites buttons set to Encrypted PDF, if a password is already stored in [Store Password], a message is displayed confirming whether to use the password stored in [Store Password] rather than the password set for the favorites buttons. If [Yes] is selected, the password stored in [Store Password] is used when sending. If [No] is selected, the password set for the favorites buttons is used when sending.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall], you can set to recall the stored password.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • If fax, I-fax, or User Inbox destinations are specified, the message telling you the send job is canceled appears. Press [OK] → check the destinations.
  • To cancel the settings, press [File Format] → [Encrypt] → [Cancel].


Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to send PDF or XPS documents with a digital signature.

You can add the following two types of digital signatures:


  • Device Signature

This mode uses the device signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which device scanned it. The recipient can verify the device that signed the document, and whether the document has been changed after it was signed.

  • User Signature

This mode uses information about the user currently logged in to the machine using an SSO-H login service and the user signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which user signed it. The recipient can verify the user that signed the document, and whether the document has been changed after it was signed.


Remark
  • You can add only a digital signature to documents sent in either the PDF, PDF (Trace), PDF (Compact), PDF (OCR), XPS, XPS (Compact), or XPS (OCR) file format. You cannot add a digital signature to documents sent in the TIFF or JPEG format.
  • If an error occurs when sending a multiple page PDF or XPS document with a digital signature, the document will not be able to be opened by the recipient.
  • If you select to add both a device signature and user signature, the device signature is added before the user signature.
  • If the recipient verifies a PDF that has had both a device signature and user signature added to it using software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat), only the user signature can be verified. The device signature causes the document to be handled as if it has been altered.
  • If you change the file format to a format other than 'PDF' or 'XPS' after setting to add a digital signature, a message confirming whether you want to change the file format is displayed. If you change the file format, the digital signatures you have set to add are canceled.
  • For information on validating certificates, registering certificates in the trusted certificates list, and verifying signatures on the recipient side, see the documentation for the software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) or the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer).


Adding a Device Signature

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
  • You can only add device signatures to PDF or XPS documents if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated and you have generated a device signature certificate and key pair in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."
  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device signature information, see "Confirming the Device Signature Certificate" or "Network."
  • If the SSO-H login service is set and an e-mail address is registered for the user, in addition to adding the device signature, the [Author] property of the PDF or XPS file is set to the e-mail address of the user.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Add Digital Signatures].

  1. Press [Device Signature] → [OK] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Adding a User Signature

You can add a user signature using information about the user currently logged in to the machine using a login service and the user signature certificate and private key inside the machine.


Remark
  • You cannot forward a received fax/I-fax document with a user signature from the machine.
  • This mode is available only under the following conditions:
  • The optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
  • A user certificate and key pair for each user is issued by the certificate authority.
  • For information on the certificate authorities that you can use for issuing user certificates for each user, see the Before Using the Digital User Signature Kit included with the Digital User Signature Kit.
  • The following conditions are necessary to add a user signature to a PDF or XPS file:
  • SSO-H login service must be set for the machine.
  • A user certificate must be installed in the machine using the Remote UI. (See "Remote UI.")

  1. Log in to the machine using a login service.

For more information on the SSO-H login service, see "Basic Operations."

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format] → select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Add Digital Signatures].

  1. Press [User Signature] → [OK] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Job Recall

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:
  • When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified, and the control panel power switch, (Start) or (Reset) is pressed
  • When the Auto Clear mode activates or after the Auto Sleep time has elapsed, after send settings are specified
  • The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
  • If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all stored settings in the Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.
  • The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.

  1. Place your originals → press [Recall].
  1. Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before] → confirm the settings → press [OK].

  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, the unit name registered for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is displayed. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.
  • You can change the settings in a recalled send job.
  • If there are multiple destinations stored in Recall memory, the order of the destinations shown in the list may not correspond to the order in which they were set.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall] when logging in using SSO-H, you can set to recall passwords that are stored.
  1. Press (Start).
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")


Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents

  • Receiving Print Jobs

The machine receives and prints print jobs sent from a computer.

  • Receiving I-Fax Documents

The I-fax function is similar to e-mail. However, instead of sending and receiving messages over the Internet, I-fax enables you to send and receive scanned document images via the Internet.

You can set the machine to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding Settings."


Remark
  • You can only receive I-fax documents if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not compatible with this machine, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files, but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message "Could not create image" are printed with the text of the received I-fax.
  • If a received I-fax document does not contain an e-mail message, and contains only a TIFF file attachment, the sender's name and subject of the e-mail (each up to 24 characters) are printed as the header of the TIFF image.

  • Receiving Fax Documents

This machine's Super G3 fax function is compatible with most Super G3 fax machines used in office environments.

You can automatically forward received fax documents to specified destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding Settings."


Remark
  • You can only receive fax documents if the optional fax board is installed.


Receiving Documents

  1. When documents are being received, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel flashes a green light.
  • During reception, the transaction number and information related to the sender are displayed on the touch panel display.
  1. When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel maintains a steady green light. This indicates that documents are stored in memory.
  • The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
  • The Error indicator flashes a red light when either the amount of available memory is low or paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
  1. The document is printed.

The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.

  • If there is no paper on which the received documents can be printed, the received documents are stored in memory.
  • The memory can hold a total of approximately 8,000 pages of sent and received documents.
  • Documents which have been stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
  • If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.


Processing Received Documents

When the Machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown below:

*1 Received I-fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*2 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional fax board is installed.
*3 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*4 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*5 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*6 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*7 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, it is printed after the paper jam is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*8 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*9 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
  • [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
  • [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned 'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*10 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*11 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
*12 The received Fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox by specifying the Confidential Fax Inbox as forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.

Remark
  • If the memory is full, no additional jobs can be processed.
  • For information on the following settings, see their respective sections:


Setting the Memory Lock Mode

You can set to store the received fax/I-fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox without printing them. After verifying the documents on the Memory RX Inbox screen, you can print or send them whenever necessary.

If you set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock mode to 'On', you can turn Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock for documents sent to the Memory RX Inbox 'On' or 'Off' as necessary. If Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', received documents are stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed. (See "Mail Box.")


Remark
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents have been stored in the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages have been stored in the inboxes
  • To receive documents in memory, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock in Memory RX Inbox Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")


Forwarding Received Documents

If you receive a fax/I-fax document, and it conforms to the specified forwarding conditions, the document is automatically forwarded to the specified destination. You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding Settings.")


Remark
  • To be able to forward received documents, you must first set Validate/Invalidate to 'On' in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding Settings.")


Erasing Received Documents

You can erase any received document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax Inboxes. If the memory is full, the machine cannot receive any more documents. It is recommended that you erase unnecessary documents as often as possible.


Remark
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents have been stored in the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages have been stored in the inboxes

  1. Press [Mail Box] → select [Memory RX Inbox] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Memory RX Inbox]: To select a received document that has been stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: To select a received document that has been forwarded to a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  1. Select the desired inbox and the document that you want to erase → press [Erase].

In the example above, Memory RX Inbox is specified.

To erase multiple documents in the memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox, select and erase one document at a time.

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • If the document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the () icon.
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked mark () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press [Send].


Available Paper Sizes

When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that has the same paper size as the received document. If paper of the correct size is not available, the machine automatically selects a different paper size in the following order. (If all the switches in Select Drawer in RX Setting under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'). The paper size is automatically selected in the same order, even if paper runs out during printing.

  • Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
A3 originals A3 → B4* → A4* → A4R*
B4 originals B4 → A3 → A4* → A4R* → B5 x 3 → B5R x 3
A4 originals A4 → A4R → B4 → A3 → A5R x 3 → B5 x 2 → B5R x 2
B5 originals B5 → B5R → A4 → A4R → B4 → A3
A5 originals A5R → A4 → A4R → B5 → B5R → B4 → A3

* Received documents are automatically reduced before being printed on the paper size indicated.

Remark
  • Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
  • Paper Sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R
  • Paper Types: plain, recycled, color, or irregular paper types (paper with the following settings; Basis Weight: 64 to 90 g/m2, Type: Normal, Finish: Uncoated or Recycled.)
  • You can specify each paper drawer for the fax/I-fax function. The default setting is 'On', except for the stack bypass. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • You can set the machine to reduce received documents from 75% to 97% in 1% increments if the document is larger than any of the available paper sizes. (See "Reducing a Received Document.")
  • You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See "2-Sided Printing.")
  • Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.


Sending with a Subaddress

If the destination fax machine is compatible with ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector) standard subaddresses and passwords, you can send or receive documents with increased security by attaching a subaddress and a password to all of your fax transactions.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax] → enter the fax number.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) which accepts only tone signals. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when an incorrect number is entered. The last number entered is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
[Direct]: Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not select Direct Sending mode, Memory Sending mode is used. (See "Sending a Fax.")
[Next]: Press to specify another destination after specifying the first destination using - (numeric keys).
[Option]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. Press to set an optional subaddress and password.
[On-hook]: Press to use tone dialing. (See "Fax Information Services.")
  • You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
  1. Press [Subaddress].

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, press [Option].

  1. Press [Subaddress] or [Password] → enter the subaddress and password using - (numeric keys), , and → press [OK].

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

  1. Press (Start).
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")


Special Dialing

Enter fax numbers as described below when the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is connected to an extension, or when you want to enter international fax numbers.

  • Calling from an Extension

When calling an outside line from an extension, the outside line access number (such as 0) is normally dialed before the fax number of the destination. In the same manner, when the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is connected to an extension, the outside line access number needs to be entered before fax numbers. You can also enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the machine waits after dialing the outside line access number when calling from an extension) together with these numbers.

  • International Dialing

You can enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the machine waits after dialing the international fax number) together with an international fax number.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.


Calling from an Extension

This section describes only the procedure for entering fax numbers.


Remark

  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax].
  1. Press [R] → [Pause] → enter a fax number.

Example: Enter 516XXXXXXX as the fax number.

Press [Pause] after entering the outside line access number ('R' in the above example) and before entering the fax number.

Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the outside line dial tone to be heard after the outside line access number is called.

Press [Backspace] when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

  • The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
  • The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds. (See "Pause Time.")
  • The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be changed.)
  • Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.
  1. Press [OK].


Entering International Fax Numbers

Follow the procedure below to enter pauses with international fax numbers.


  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax].
  1. Enter the international fax number → press [Pause].

Example:

International Dialing Code: 010

Country code: 1

Area code: 516

Fax number: XXX-XXXX

[Pause]: Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the dial tone to be heard after dialing is completed.

[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

  • The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
  • The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds.(See "Pause Time.")
  • The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be changed.)
  • Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.
  • The location of a pause and the actual pause time may differ depending on the telephone system. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company for further details.
  1. Press [OK].

The specified destination appears in the destination list on the Send Basic Features screen.



Fax Information Services

Many fax information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel reservations, etc., require tone dialing for their services. If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse telephone line, follow the procedure below to temporarily set the machine for tone dialing.


Remark
  • Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • When you use fax information services, you cannot specify a destination that is stored in the Address Book or use the Job Recall mode.

  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].

  1. Press [On-hook] → enter the number of the fax information service using - (numeric keys).

  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the line will be disconnected if you press [On-hook], and then remove the control card while the line is engaged.

  • Select the desired one-touch button.

One-touch buttons are assigned a three digit number. To specify a destination using a one-touch button's three digit number, enter the three digit number using - (numeric keys).

  • Press [OK].

  1. When your call is answered and you hear the recorded message of the fax information service, press [Tone].

If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary.

The volume of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [] or [].

  1. Enter the numbers requested by the fax information service using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • If you require more information about the service, contact the company providing the service.
  1. Press [RX Start] if you require a faxed copy of the information.

If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press [End].



Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs

This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs. For more information, see "What This Machine Can Do."


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, send jobs to e-mail, I-fax, and file servers can be checked/changed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax jobs can be checked/changed.
  • The maximum number of send jobs that are displayed on the Send Status screen is 120.
  • The maximum number of send and receive jobs that are displayed on the Send Log screen is 100.


Checking Send Job Details

You can check detailed information of any send job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was specified.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send] → [Status] or [Log].


  1. Select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].
  • You cannot check the status of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed. To check their statuses, see the Send Job Status screen for Fax.
  • If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when multiple destinations are selected for a send job, <Finished.> is displayed for those destinations to which the job was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed for those destinations that had transmission errors. When multiple destinations are simultaneously specified for a send job, and you select and cancel the transmission to any one of those destinations, or the retransmission of an error job or an interrupted job is completed successfully, information on all of those simultaneously specified destinations is displayed in the log.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. In this case, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout> in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.

  • Check the details.

To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination.")

To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job.")


  • Check the details.
  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Check the status for each destination.

To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination.")

To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job.")


  • Check the details.


Changing the Destination

You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.


Remark
  • You can only change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error or jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send mode and are still waiting in the send queue.
  • To be able to change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")
  • You cannot change more than one destination at the same time. You also cannot change the destination of a whole group at once.
  • You cannot change the destination of a send job if another job with the same job number is being sent or is waiting in the send queue. This restriction does not apply to Delayed Send jobs.
  • You cannot change the destinations of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you cannot change the destination, regardless of the destination type.
  • You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot change the destination of a job from an e-mail address to an I-fax address. Also, you cannot change the destination of a job from a fax number to a User Inbox.
  • If a job is specified to be stored in a User Inbox, you cannot change the inbox in which to store the job.

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send] → [Status].

  1. Select the job whose destination you want to change → press [Details].

  1. Select the destination that you want to change.

  • Press [Change Destination].

  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Select the destination that you want to change → press [Change Destination].

  1. Change the destination.

The types of destinations and the settings that you can change are:

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
  • E-mail: E-mail Address
  • I-Fax: I-Fax Address, Mode, Send Via Server (On/Off)
  • File: Host Name, Folder Path, User, Password
  • If the optional fax board is installed:
  • Fax: Fax Number
  1. Press [OK].


Resending a Job

You can resend jobs that are canceled due to transmission errors.


Remark
  • To be able to resend jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")
  • You cannot resend fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Send] → [Status].

  1. Select the job that you want to resend → press [Details].

  1. Select the destination to resend the job to.

  • Press [Resend].

  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Select the destination to resend the job to → press [Resend].
  • The job is placed in the send queue if there is another job being sent or waiting to be processed.


Printing the Send Job Status/Log

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Send] → select [Status] or [Log].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Status]: Press this key if you want to print the send job list (Send Job List).
[Log]: Press this key if you want to print the send job log (Activity Report).
  1. Press [Print List].
  • You cannot print the Send Job List for fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The send job status/log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Basic Operations.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Status of Fax Jobs

This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs. For more information, see "What This Machine Can Do."


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • The maximum number of jobs that are displayed is:
  • Send Job Status screen: 64 jobs
  • Received Job Status screen: 3 jobs
  • Log screen: 100 jobs


Checking Fax Job Details

You can check the detailed information of any fax job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was specified.


  1. Press [System Monitor].


  1. Press [Fax] → [Send Job Status], [Received Job Status], or [Log].


  • Select the job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  • Press [Details].
  • You can select between three received fax jobs to check.

  • Select the job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  1. Check the details of the selected job.

If you selected a job with multiple destinations in [Send Job Status], press [Broadcast List] → check the status of each destinations → press [Done].



Printing the Fax Activity Report

You can print the Fax Activity Report, which includes the fax transmission's start time, destination, job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and transmission result.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Fax] → [Log].

  1. Press [Print List].
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The Fax Activity Report can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs

You can check the details of received documents stored in memory, as well as the status of forwarded jobs and receive jobs.


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', <Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen are not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • Up to 100 documents for the total of send and receive jobs combined can be displayed on the job log (Activity Report (RX)) screen.


Checking Receive Job Details

You can check the detailed information of any received job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was received.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  1. Check the details of the selected job.


Printing the Receive Job Log

You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Print List].
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The receive job log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Arrival of a Receive Job

The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for the arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs].

The screen below is displayed while the machine is checking for the arrival of an I-fax.

  • To be able to use [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs], you must first set the POP setting in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On' so that you can receive documents using POP. (See "Network.")


Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded

You can check the details of jobs that have been forwarded, depending on the forwarding settings.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Forwarding Status].

  1. Select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].
  • If 120 send jobs have accumulated on the job status screen, jobs that are waiting to be forwarded are displayed on the Forwarding Status screen.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.


What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are not changed when you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

  1. Select an Additional Functions setting.

If you select [System Settings] and the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, press [System Settings] → enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys) → press (Log In/Out).

If a password has been set for the Address Book in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings, press [Address Book Settings] → enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password.")

  1. Press a mode key to specify its settings.

  • Some screens are divided into several screens, press [] or [] to scroll through the lists.

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen appears.


Communications Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Communications Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • Common Settings
Item Settings Delivered
TX Settings
Unit Name for E-Mail/I-Fax*2 24 characters maximum No
Erase Failed TX On*1, Off Yes
Data Compression Ratio*2 High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio Yes
Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1 Yes
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Retry Times*2 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1 Yes
Edit Standard Send Settings If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
  • Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi*1
  • File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select*1
  • Stamp: Off
If only the optional fax board is installed:
  • Scanning Mode: Black 200 dpi*1
  • Stamp: Off
If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed:
  • Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi*1
  • File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select*1
  • Stamp: Off
No
Register Favorites Button Register/Edit, Erase: M1 to M18
Display Comment: On, Off*1
Yes
Display Confirmation for Favorites Button On*1, Off No
Image Level for High Compression*2 Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode:
  • Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Image Level in Text Mode:
  • Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings*3 Smart Scan: On*1, Off
Number of Characters for Document Name Setting:
1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1
Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings*3 Outline Graphics: On*1, Off
Graphics Recognition Level: Normal*1, Moderate, High
Background Image Level: Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
Check Device Signature Certificate*4 Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Check User Signature Certificate*5 Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Default Screen for Send Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons, New Address*1 No
TX Terminal ID On*1;

If the optional fax board is installed:
  • TX Terminal ID: On
  • Printing Position: Outside
  • Display Destination Name: On
  • Telephone # Mark: FAX
Off
Yes
Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending*2 On*1, Off Yes
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs*2 Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Initialize TX Settings Initialize No
RX Settings
2-Sided Print On, Off*1 Yes
Select Drawer Switch A: On*1, Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Yes
Receive Reduction On*1
  • RX Reduction: Auto
  • Reduce %: 90%
  • Reduce Direction: Vertical Only
Off
Yes
Received Page Footer On, Off*1 Yes
2 On 1 Log On, Off*1 Yes

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*3 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
*4 Indicates an item that appears only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
*5 Indicates an item that appears only if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
  • Fax Settings*6
Item Settings Delivered
Basic Settings
Sender's Names (TTI) 01 to 99: Register/Edit, Erase No
TX Settings
ECM TX On*1, Off Yes
Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds; 4 seconds*1 Yes
Auto Redial On*1

Option:
  • Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1
  • Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2 minutes*1
  • TX Error Resend: Error and 1st page*1, All pages, Off
Off
Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending*7 On, Off*8 Yes
RX Settings
ECM RX On*1, Off Yes
Line Options
Line 1 No

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tele Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
Line 2*9, Line 3*9 No

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tele Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
TX Line Selection If the optional fax board is installed:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
  • Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*6 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.
*7 Indicates the default setting (however, the default setting may be different in some regions.).
*8 Indicates an item that does not appear in some regions.
*9 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

Remark
  • The Communications Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Select the item and press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Automatic Document Deletion

If transmission of a document has failed, this mode automatically erases that document from memory.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Erase Failed TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or with an error.
[Off]: Stores a job in memory if the transmission ends in an error. From the System Monitor screen, you can resend jobs whose transmissions have failed, or change the destinations and resend the jobs. (See "Changing the Destination" and "Resending a Job.")
  • Even if the Erase Failed TX mode is set to 'Off', fax documents sent in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver do not remain in memory when the transmission ends in an error.


Data Compression Ratio

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the data size, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the data size, but results in high quality images.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If [PDF (Compact)], [PDF (Trace)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, set [Data Compression Ratio] to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If [Data Compression Ratio] is set to 'High Ratio', the images that are output may be of a low quality even if 'Image Priority' is selected in Image Level for High Compression in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Data Compression Ratio].
  1. Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[High Ratio]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and image quality are in between those of [High Ratio] and [Low Ratio].
[Low Ratio]: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.


Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded

You can set how the machine handles the documents that fail to be forwarded.


Remark
  • If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen. The document will not be processed according to the settings you make for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors].
  1. Select [Always Print], [Store/Print], or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Always Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are printed.
[Store/Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are stored in the Memory RX Inbox. The machine automatically prints the documents that fail to be forwarded if Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off'. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory" and "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory.")
[Off]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are not printed.


Setting the Photo Mode

You can set whether to use the Photo mode. When the Photo Mode is set to 'On', you can select [Printed Image] or [Photo] for scanning originals that contain photos or printed images.


Remark
  • [Printed Image] can only be selected if the color mode is set to [Black and White]. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, [Printed Image] can be selected regardless of the color modes settings.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Photo Mode].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Number of Retry Attempts

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select '0' to turn the Retry Times mode 'Off'.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Retry Times].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the number of Retry Times → press [OK].

If the number of retry times is set to '0', the machine will not resend the data.



Standard Send Settings

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode" and "Sending Methods.")


Remark
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, the file format set here is disabled.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can also change the file format.
  • If you send documents by fax or I-fax, the file format set here is disabled. However, if [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format in the Standard Send Settings and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. If this happens, change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Edit Standard Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Scanning Mode]:

Press the Scanning Mode drop-down list → select a scan mode.

You can also select a scan mode that you have already stored. (See "User Preset Keys.")

[Stamp]:

Press [Stamp].

To cancel this setting, press [Stamp] again.

[File Formats]:

Press [File Format] → select a file format.

The file format can be selected from the following formats. For more information on each format, see the following section.

  • [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/XPS Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [JPEG], [TIFF]: See "Setting the File Format."
  • [OCR (Text Searchable)] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • [Trace & Smooth] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • [Compact] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode on the Send Basic Features screen, press (Reset).
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."


Favorites Buttons

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a favorites button in memory. There are 18 favorites buttons and they can be assigned names and comments for increased convenience. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.


Registering a Favorites Button

  1. Specify the send settings that you want to register → press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) for registering the send settings → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.

  1. Press [Store].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can assign a name to a favorites button by pressing [Name].
  • You can also assign a comment to a favorites button by pressing [Comment].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings → press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings → press [Yes].


Naming a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to name → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  1. Press [Name].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M18).


Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].

If <Display Comment> is set to 'On', the registered comments are displayed after you press [Favorites] on the Send Basic Features screen.

  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to comment → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  1. Press [Comment].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also register comments on keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a comment → press [OK].


Erasing a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select the favorites button with the send settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons

This mode enables you to set whether to display a confirmation screen when recalling destinations and settings using favorites buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Display Confirmation for Favorites Button].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: A confirmation screen is displayed when a favorites button is recalled.
[Off]: A confirmation screen is not displayed when a favorites button is recalled.


Image Level for High Compression

If PDF (Trace), PDF (Compact), or XPS (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the image quality level of the document.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Image Level for High Compression].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and image quality are in between those of [Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
  • The setting made for <Image Level in Text Mode> or <Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode> is enabled only if the Text/Photo mode or Photo mode is selected from the Original Type drop-down list. However, if [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format and Text mode selected as the original type, this setting is disabled.
  • If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level. However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter which image level you select.


OCR (Text Searchable) Settings

This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) on a scanned original to create a PDF or XPS file with searchable text.

You can set the Smart Scan mode and the Document Name OCR mode. Smart Scan is a mode which automatically detects the orientation of the characters on the original when sending it. The Document Name OCR mode enables you to use text extracted from the original as the filename of the document to be sent. You can set the number of characters to use for Document Name OCR. (See "Sending Methods.")


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated. For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  • The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be used at the same time.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [OCR (Text Searchable) Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Smart Scan>:

[On]: The orientation of the original is detected, and the document is automatically rotated before sending.
[Off]: The orientation of the original is not detected, and the document is sent as is.

<Number of Characters for Document Name Setting>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the number of characters.



Trace & Smooth Settings

When outlining documents that are to be sent, you can change the recognition rate of line drawings of the original.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Trace & Smooth Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Outline Graphics>:

[On]: Outlining of the graphics is performed.
[Off]: Outlining of the graphics is performed.

<Graphics Recognition Level>:

[Normal]: Sets a standard recognition level. (The data size becomes small.)
[Moderate]: The recognition level and data size are in between those of [Normal] and [High].
[High]: Sets the highest recognition level. (The data size becomes large.)

<Background Image Level>:

[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the background image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and background image quality are in between those of [Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]: The data size is large, but the background image quality is high.
  • For <Graphics Recognition Level>, by increasing the recognition level, the data size becomes larger as well. It is recommended that you first use [Normal], and if desirable results are not obtained, to try increasing the recognition level in the order of [Moderate] and [High].


Confirming the Device Signature Certificate

You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a device signature to PDF or XPS files.


Remark
  • You cannot press [Check Device Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for adding a device signature have not been generated. For more information on the certificate and key pair for adding a device signature, see "Network."
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Check Device Signature Certificate].
  1. To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].
  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device signature information, see "Network."


Checking a User Signature Certificate

You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a user signature to PDF or XPS files.


Remark
  • You cannot press [Check User Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for adding a user signature have not been installed. For more information on installing a user certificate, see "Network."
  • This mode is available only if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated, and you are logged in to the machine using the SSO-H login service.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Check User Signature Certificate].
  1. To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].


Initial Send Screen Display

This mode enables you to set whether [Favorites], [One-touch], or [New Address] tabs will be displayed on the initial Send Basic Features screen when the power is turned ON, or the Auto Clear mode is activated. You can also switch the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, which displays enlarged Favorites Buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Default Screen for Send].

  1. Select [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New Address] → press [OK].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Enlarged Display> → press [OK].

<Enlarged Display>:

[On]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays enlarged favorites buttons.
[Off]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays regular size favorites buttons.


Printing the TX Terminal ID

The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax or I-fax. Information such as your fax number, name, and I-fax address is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [TX Terminal ID].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Printing Position>:

[Inside]: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.

[Outside]:

The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.

<Display Destination Name>:

[On]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is not displayed in the Terminal ID information.

Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Printing Position>:

[Inside]: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.

<Display Destination Name>:

[On]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is not displayed in the Terminal ID information.

<Telephone # Mark>:

[FAX]: "FAX" is printed before the fax number.
[TEL]: "TEL" is printed before the telephone number.

Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:


  • Press [OK].


Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV

Chunked encoding is a function for sending a file with an unknown size by dividing it into chunks of a known length. It enables the sending time to be reduced because it is not necessary to calculate the size of the file before sending it.

You can set whether to divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.


Remark
  • You may not be able to send files with chunked encoding, depending on certain conditions for the WebDAV server and proxy server.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If [Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending] is set to 'Off', the speed when sending with WebDAV is slightly slower than normal.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.
[Off]: Do not divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.


Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs

If you are sending to an e-mail or file server destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs].
  1. Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma 1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) → press [OK].


Initializing TX Settings

You can restore almost all of the TX settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize the Sender's Names (TTI), Unit Name, Unit Name for E-mail/I-Fax, Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors, and TX Terminal ID settings.
  • If you initialize the TX Settings, the settings stored in the favorites buttons are also initialized.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Initialize TX Settings].
  1. Press [Yes].


2-Sided Printing

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [2-Sided Print].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Paper Drawer Selection

You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching the size of the received document.

There are four printing methods (Switches A, B, C, and D):

  • Switch A: The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same combined size as the received document.

  • Switch B: The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the received document.

  • Switch C: The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the received document.

  • Switch D: The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received document.


Remark
  • For more information on selecting a paper source for printing received documents, see "Additional Functions."

  1. (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → under [RX Settings] <Common Settings> → [Select Drawer].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for the respective switches → press [OK].


Reducing a Received Document

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Receive Reduction].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].
  • If you select [Off], the received document is not automatically reduced to fit the size of the paper. If the size of the received document exceeds the printable area, the image is divided into equal sections and printed onto separate sheets of paper.
  • Regardless of the settings you set for Receive Reduction, if the area of the image which exceeds the printable area is less than 12 mm, it will not be printed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<RX Reduction>:

[Auto]: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio that can range from the value set for <Reduce %> up to 100% of the received document size.
[Fixed Reduction]: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %>.

<Reduce %>:

Press [-] or [+] to specify the reduction ratio.

<Reduce Direction>:

[Vertical & Horizontal]: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
[Vertical Only]: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.

  • Press [OK].


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Received Page Footer].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


2 On 1 Log

This mode enables you to print two received documents of the same paper size onto a single sheet of paper.
The 2 On 1 Log mode is available only under the following conditions:

  • The same paper drawer must be selected for printing two consecutive pages of the received document.
  • The paper in the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two consecutive pages to be printed out.
    Example: Example: If the A4 paper drawer is empty, but the A3 drawer is loaded, you can print two A4 documents onto a single sheet of A3 paper.

Remark
  • When the 2 On 1 Log mode is set to 'On', documents are printed with a dotted line in the middle. If the document is printed with sender information, the dotted line is not printed in the area where the sender information is located.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [2 On 1 Log].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


ECM Transmission

ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM 'Off'.


Remark
  • If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Transmission be set in both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [ECM TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Pause Time

Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Pause Time].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the pause time → press [OK].


Auto Redial

Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.

Auto Redial can be turned 'On' or 'Off'. If you set Auto Redial to 'On', you can set how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to an error.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Auto Redial].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Press [Option] → specify each setting → press [OK] → [OK].

<Redial Times>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the number of redial times.

<Redial Interval>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the redial interval.

<TX Error Resend>:

[Error and 1st page]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.
[All pages]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document are resent.
[Off]: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.

  • Press [OK].


Checking the Dial Tone before Sending

You can set whether the machine checks for a dial tone before dialing when sending a fax.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • This mode is not available in some regions.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Check Dial Tone Before Sending].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • The Check Dial Tone Before Sending mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).


ECM Reception

You can receive incoming documents using ECM (Error Correction Mode).

ECM is a mode which automatically corrects errors in an image while it is being received.


Remark
  • If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Reception be set in both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [ECM RX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you must register a different fax number for the additional line. This number is printed on the document that you fax to the receiving party.

The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine, depending on their type of machine.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Unit Telephone #].

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Enter the machine's telephone number using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Space]: Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.

[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.

[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.



Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line

Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a department name is optional) for an additional line.

When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name or company's name (and department's name, if applicable) as the sender's information on the recording paper.

Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during transmission.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Unit Name].

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Enter a name → press [OK].

Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line

Set the type of additional telephone line that is connected to the machine.

If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Tel Line Type]

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Select the type of telephone line → press [OK].

If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.



Selecting the Line for Sending

You can register the method for selecting the line to use for sending.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • If you select another line for sending on the Send Settings screen or One-touch Buttons screen, that setting takes priority.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [TX Line Selection].
  1. Setting the line to use for sending.

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 1: The optional fax board is installed

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Details of each item are shown below.

[Priority TX]: When sending, the line specified in [Priority TX] is selected if the line is not in use.
[Prohibit TX]: The line specified in [Prohibit TX] is restricted. (The specified line is only used for receiving).
  • The same line cannot be set for both [Priority TX] and [Prohibit TX].
  • Specify at least one line in [Priority Sending]. You cannot set all lines in [Prohibit TX].
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.


Address Book Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Address Book Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


Item Settings Delivered
Register Address Register New Address
Edit
Erase
Incremental
Yes
Register Address Book Name Register Name Yes
One-touch Buttons Register/Edit, Erase Yes

Remark
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


About the Address Book

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into 10 subaddress books and one-touch buttons. You can store up to 1,800 destinations, including 1,600 destinations in the subaddress books, and 200 destinations in one-touch buttons. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply-to e-mail address and use the Job Done Notice function.

The following types of destinations can be stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e-mail address is registered in a group address, that e-mail address and the group address are counted as two entries. In the same way, if a fax number is registered in a group address, the fax number, and group address are counted as two entries.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can be registered in the Address Book.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and group addresses can be registered in the Address Book.
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can later be imported in the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see "Remote UI."

  • Fax

You can store fax numbers, as well as subaddress and password information.

A fax number obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored.

  • E-mail

You can store e-mail addresses.

An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored.

  • I-Fax

You can store the I-fax address, the mode, and the destination conditions.

An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored as an I-fax address.

  • File

You can register a protocol, host name, folder path, etc. for storing scanned documents in a file server.


Remark
  • For examples of settings needed for sending to a file server, see "Network."

  • Group

You can register multiple destinations of various types in a group address. You can group and use these registered destinations according to your needs.


Remark
  • You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations must be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
  • When you register destinations in a group address, you can select and store only destinations registered in the same subaddress book.


Storing New Addresses

If you register a destination in the Address Book, you can save yourself the effort of entering the destination every time it is used. That destination can also be selected from the Address Book for use in any other customized setting.


Remark
  • If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode, set the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to On. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering the access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed again.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the access number that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Access Number Settings screen. (See "Security.")
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
    You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.


Fax Numbers

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Press [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Fax].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the recipient of the fax → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The fax number that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.


  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <p> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
[Option]: Press to specify the subaddress, password, ECM TX, sending speed, and type of call settings. These settings are optional.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
  • You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Subaddress] and [Password]:

Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the recipient's password for confirmation → press [OK].

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

<ECM TX>:

Select [On] or [Off].

<Sending Speed>:

Press the Sending Speed drop-down list → select the desired sending speed.

If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

<Long Distance>:

Press the Long Distance drop-down list → select the type of call.

Select [Long Distance (1)] if transmission errors occur frequently when you make overseas calls (when the number is stored in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].

<Line Selection>:

Press the Line Selection drop-down list → select the line.

[Line 1]: Standard Line

[Line 2]: Additional Line

[Line 3]: Additional Line

[Auto]: A line is selected according to the settings you made for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T standard subaddresses.
  • The Line Selection drop-down list is displayed only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board is or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password you enter is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


E-Mail Addresses

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [E-mail].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the e-mail address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The e-mail address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press [E-mail Address] → enter the e-mail address → press [OK].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into pages and sent as multiple e-mail messages.
  • Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is not able to combine divided data.

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


I-Fax Addresses

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [I-Fax].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The I-fax address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press the Mode drop-down list → select [Simple] or [Full].

<Mode>:

[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax was sent successfully.

In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be compatible with the Full mode.

  • If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in I-Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.
  1. Press [I-Fax Address] → enter the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • If you do not send documents via a server, and if the recipient's IP address is not registered with a DNS server, enter the domain name in the following format: (user)@(the recipient's IP address).
  1. Press [Standard Field 1] and [Standard Field 2] → enter their respective standard fields → press [OK].

Standard Field 1 and Standard Field 2 are settings required for using an Internet fax service. For details, contact your service provider.

If you do not use an Internet fax service, this step is not necessary.

  • After pressing [OK], the standard field that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the I-fax settings screen.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.

<Send Via Server>

[On]: Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
[Off]: Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is possible before you set Send Via Server to 'Off'.

If you specify the Standard Field settings, set Send Via Server to 'On'.

  • To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to 'On' on the I-Fax Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the I-Fax Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server> is grayed out. (See "I-Fax Settings.")
  • Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
  1. Press [Destination Conditions] → specify the paper size, compression method, and resolution.

The following conditions are always selected:

  • Paper Size: A4/LTR
  • Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
  • Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi

A5 is included in [A4/LTR].

  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  • Available compression methods are:
  • MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
  • MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
  • MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive Divided Data> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a sending error occurs.
  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


File Server Addresses

Remark
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the host name and folder path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • For examples of the settings needed to send to a file server, see "Network."
  • UPN can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [File].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the file server address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The file server address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select the desired protocol.
  1. Set [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password].
  • For instructions on specifying each of the settings for FTP, Windows (SMB), NetWare (IPX), and WebDAV, see "Specifying a File Server."

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


Group Addresses

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 256 stored destinations as a single destination.


Remark
  • If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such as fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and file server addresses.
  • If you want to store a group address, you can only select destinations that you registered in the same subaddress book.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User Inbox can be stored in a group address.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and a User Inbox can be stored in a group address.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Group].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the group address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The group address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.


  1. Select [Address Book] or [Store In Usr Inbox].

To store destinations in a group address, those destinations must be stored in the subaddress book that contains the group address.

You cannot store destinations from different subaddress books in the group address. For example, you cannot store e-mail addresses from Address Book 1 and file server addresses from Address Book 2 into the same group address.


  • Select the destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the check mark.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list. If only the optional fax board is installed, the Type drop-down list is not displayed.

You can select a destination and press [Details] to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destinations. Press [Done] to return to the previous screen.

Repeat step 6 to add other destinations.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")

  • Select the User Inbox from the Inbox Selection screen → press [OK].
  • Only one User Inbox can be stored in a group address.

  • Select a destination from the group address → press [Erase].

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.


  • Press [OK].


Addresses Obtained via a Server

You can store an address that is obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • The information that can be obtained through the LDAP server varies, depending on the installed or activated options, as follows:
  • If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated: names and e-mail addresses
  • If only the fax board is installed: names and fax numbers
  • If both the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the fax board is installed: names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Network Add. Book].

  1. Press the Server to Search drop-down list → select the desired server to search.


  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as the search criterion, and vice versa.

  • Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] → enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which you want to search → press [OK].

The search criteria boxes that are not filled out are not searched.

To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press [Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.


  • Press [Detailed Search].
  • Press the search category drop-down list → select the desired search category.

The available search categories are:

[Name]: Search by name.
[E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]: Search by fax number.
[Organization]: Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept

  • The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
  • Press the search condition drop-down list → select the desired search condition → press [Settings].

You can select from the following search conditions:

[contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[differs from]: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • Enter the search criterion → press [OK].
  • Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] → repeat step 4.

[or]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit → press [Edit] → [Settings].

To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
  • If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

  1. Press [Start Searching].

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings."
  • If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:

  • If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.


  1. Select the destination that you want to store in the Address Book from the search results → press [Next].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You can select multiple destinations.

If you want to select the first 64 destinations, press [Select All (Max 64 destinations)]. (If a destination is selected, the key changes to [Clear Selection].)

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You can register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing [Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the check mark.

  1. Store the selected destination.
  • The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names and e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.

  • Verify the address → press [OK].

If necessary, edit the contents of the address.

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].

Press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.


  • Select the subaddress book in which to store the addresses → press [OK].

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • If you want to register a fax number or I-fax address as a new destination, read the displayed message → press [OK].
  • The maximum number of destinations that can be selected at one time is 64.

  • Verify the address → press [OK].

If necessary, edit the contents of the address.

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].

Press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.



Editing Address Details

You can change destination details as necessary.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Select the destination to be changed → press [Edit].

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.

If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot edit these destinations. For instructions on storing and editing one-touch buttons, see "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons."

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Edit the address details.

You cannot change the address book of a group address, or change a destination registered as a group address.

  • For instructions on setting fax numbers, see "Fax Numbers."

  1. Finish editing the address details.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric Keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.


  • Press [OK].
  • If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode, set the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering the access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed again.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the access number that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Access Number Settings screen. (See "Security.")


Erasing Addresses

You can erase destinations stored in the address book.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Select the destination to be erased → press [Erase].

You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.

If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot erase these destinations. For instructions on erasing one-touch buttons, see "Erasing One-Touch Buttons."

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Naming an Address Book

You can assign a name to any subaddress book.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address Book Name].
  1. Select a subaddress book to name → press [Register Name].
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the subaddress book name reverts to its current name (default Address Book 1 to 10).
  1. Press [OK].


Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons

You can store up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons. This section describes how to store/edit the destinations with the one-touch buttons feature.


Remark
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the host name and folder path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • Destinations stored in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
  • A new destination cannot be registered in a group destination that is stored in a one-touch button. The destination must be registered in a one-touch button in advance.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can be stored in a one-touch button.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and group addresses can be stored in a one-touch button.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons].
  1. Select a one-touch button to store or change → press [Register/Edit].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

If you select a one-touch button already storing a destination, proceed to step 4.

  • One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the destinations are displayed.
  • If you register multiple destinations as a group address in a one-touch button, the number of destinations registered in the group address is displayed.

  1. Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], [File], [Group], or [Network Add. Book].

  • Enter a name for the recipient of the fax in accordance with steps 4 and 5 of "Fax Numbers."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Enter the fax number of the destination in accordance with step 7 of "Fax Numbers."

  • Enter a name for the e-mail address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "E-Mail Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the e-mail address and Divided Data Destination setting in accordance with steps 6 and 7 of "E-Mail Addresses."

  • Enter a name for the I-fax address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "I-Fax Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the I-fax mode, I-fax address, standard fields, send via server setting, or destination condition in accordance with steps 6 to 11 of "I-Fax Addresses."

  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the protocol, host name, folder path, user, and password in accordance with steps 6 and 7 of "File Server Addresses."

  • Enter a name for the group address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "Group Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Press [Specifying Destinations].
  • Select a destination to store in the group address from [Address Book], the one-touch buttons, or [Store In Usr Inbox] → press [OK].

Only destinations that are already stored in one-touch buttons can be selected as part of a one-touch button group address.

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).


  • Select the destination that you want to store in the one-touch button from the search results → press [Next].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You can register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing [Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • If necessary, edit the contents of the destination.
  • Press [One-touch Button Name] → enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.

  1. Press [OK].


Erasing One-Touch Buttons

You can erase the destinations that you have stored in one-touch buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons].
  1. Select the one-touch button containing the destination(s) you want to erase → press [Erase].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

  • Make sure that you verify the settings first before you erase them.
  • One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the destinations are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


System Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

Item Settings Delivered
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings*2

Maximum Data Size for Sending

0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1 Yes

Default Subject

40 characters maximum; Attached Image*1 Yes

Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination

On, Off*1 No
E-mail Settings*2

Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender

On*1, Off No
I-Fax Settings*2

Full Mode TX Timeout

1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 Yes

Divided Data RX Timeout

0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 Yes

Print MDN/DSN on Receipt

On, Off*1 Yes

Always send notice for RX errors

On*1, Off Yes

Use Send Via Server

On, Off*1 Yes

Allow MDN Not Via Server

On*1, Off Yes
Fax Settings*3

Send Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Password

20 digits maximum No

R-key Setting

PSTN*1, PBX Yes
Memory RX Inbox Settings

Memory RX Inbox Password

Seven digits maximum No

Use Fax Memory Lock*3

On, Off*1 Yes

Use I-Fax Memory Lock*2

On, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock Start Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock End Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes
Restrict the Send Function
Address Book Password Seven digits maximum Yes
Access Number Management On, Off*1 Yes
Restrict New Addresses Fax: On, Off*1
E-mail: On, Off*1
I-Fax: On, Off*1
File: On, Off*1
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX*3 On*1, Off Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers*3 On, Off*1 Yes
E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction*2 Restrict Sending to Domains; On, Off*1
Register, Edit, Erase*6
Yes
Allow Sending with Expired Certificates*4 On, Off*1 Yes
Always Add Device Signature to Send*5 On:
  • Restrict File Format: On*1, Off
Off*1
Yes
Forwarding Settings Receive Type*6, Validate/Invalidate, Register, Edit*6, Erase*6, Forward w/o Conditions, Print List*6, E-mail Priority*6 Yes
Register LDAP Server Register, Edit, Erase, Register/Edit LDAP Search, Print List No
Erasing All Encrypted PDF Passwords Erase No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*3 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.
*4 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set or the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
*5 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
*6 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.

Remark
  • The System Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Communications Settings

This section describes the e-mail, I-fax, fax, and Memory RX Inbox settings.



E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings

You can change the e-mail and I-fax transmission settings. The following settings are available.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  • Maximum Data Size for Sending

Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If an e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent.


Remark
  • When sending an e-mail or I-fax document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending.

  • Default Subject

The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.

  • Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination

If you are using a login service, you can specify whether to set the e-mail address of the login user as the reply-to destination when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Maximum Data Size for Sending>:

Specify the maximum data size for sending by pressing [-] or [+].

<Subject>:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject → press [OK].

<Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination>:

[On]: The e-mail address of the login user is set as the reply-to destination.
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the reply-to destination.
  • The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server.
  • If you enter '0' MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  • If an e-mail address is entered as the reply-to destination on the Send Settings screen when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document, the e-mail address specified on the Send Settings screen is given priority, regardless of whether Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination is set to 'On'.


E-Mail Settings

If you are using a login service, you can set whether to display the e-mail address of the login user in the From field as the sender destination on the received e-mail.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail Settings] → [Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[On]: The e-mail address of the authorized user is set as the sender destination in the From field on the received e-mail message.
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the sender destination in the From field on the received e-mail message.


I-Fax Settings

You can change the I-fax transmission settings. The following settings are available.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  • Full Mode TX Timeout

Sets the time that elapses before sending operations terminate (automatically) if you do not receive a notification e-mail message (MDN) from the recipient when you send an I-fax in the Full Mode.

  • Divided Data RX Timeout

If it takes longer than the set Divided Data RX Timeout time to receive all the parts of a divided I-fax document, only the data which has been received is combined to form the document. Data which can be combined to form complete pages is printed, and any remaining data is erased.


Remark
  • If you delete the divided data, it cannot be combined to form a document even if the remaining divided data is received later.
  • Divided data cannot be printed as a regular image unless it has been combined.
  • If you select [Print When Erased] on the Divided Data RX Inbox screen for the Mail Box function to print the data which is erased, the data will not be forwarded or stored in memory. It will only be printed.

  • Print MDN/DSN on Receipt

Sets whether to print notification e-mail messages that inform you of the successful delivery of I-fax jobs sent using the Full Mode.

  • Always Send Notice for RX Errors

Sets whether to inform the sender that the e-mail message or I-fax was not received successfully.

  • Use Send Via Server

Determines whether you can select to send jobs via a server on the screen for specifying I-fax destination settings. To be able to select 'On' or 'Off' for <Send Via Server> on the I-fax settings screen, set <Use Send Via Server> and <Allow Not Via Server> to 'On' beforehand.

  • Allow MDN Not Via Server

Sets whether to allow the recipient machine to send MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail directly to the IP address of the sending machine without going via a mail server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [I-Fax Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Full Mode TX Timeout>

Specify the full mode RX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].

<Divided Data RX Timeout>:

Specify the divided data RX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].

<Print MDN/DSN on Receipt>:

[On]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful delivery of jobs are printed.
[Off]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful delivery of jobs are not printed.

<Always send notice for RX errors>:

[On]: If an error occurs, the sender is always informed of the details of the error.
[Off]: If an error occurs, the sender is not informed of the details of the error.

<Use Send Via Server>:

[On]: Enables you to set whether to use the Send Via Server setting as a condition to send to I-fax addresses.
[Off]: You cannot use the Send Via Server setting as a condition to send to I-fax addresses.

<Allow MDN Not Via Server>:

[On]: Allows the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without going via a mail server.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without going via a mail server.
  • If you set the divided data RX timeout time to '0', no divided data RX timeout time is set.
  • For I-fax, when <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', even if you enter the maximum data size for sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  • The maximum data size for sending can be set in 1 MB increments. If the size of an e-mail exceeds the set limit, the e-mail message is split up by page and sent out as smaller e-mail messages, each of which is within the set limit. I-fax data that exceeds the set limit is handled as an error, and is not sent. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.


Fax Settings

This section describes settings that the System Manager can make, including how to set the Send Start Speed, Receive Start Speed, RX (Receive) mode, and how to register a password. It also describes how to set, change, and erase settings for transferring received documents, and how to enable or disable certain settings.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Send/Receive Start Speed

This function enables you to change the send and receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending or receiving of a document.

  • Receive Password

This function enables you to set an optional ITU-T standard password. If a subaddress is not set in a document that was received from another party using the ITU-T standard, an RX password check takes place. If the RX password found does not match the RX password set with this mode, or if an RX password is not attached to the document, the document is not received.


Remark
  • ITU-T stands for International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector, which is the group that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Fax Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Send Start Speed>:

Press the Send Start Speed drop-down list → select the desired start speed.

If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or [2400 bps].

<Receive Start Speed>:

Press the Receive Start Speed drop-down list → select the desired start speed.

If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or [2400 bps].

<Receive Password>:

Press [Settings] → enter [Password] and [Confirm] using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

  • Priority is given to a subaddress password if the received document is set with a subaddress, even if a receive password is set.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Memory RX Inbox Settings

There may be occasions when you want to store all incoming documents into memory until you are ready to print or send them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called Memory Lock. After Memory Lock is turned 'On', the machine will enter the Memory Lock mode. Documents received when the machine is in the Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you unlock the memory with a password, and print or send them.

This section explains how to define a memory lock password, receive fax/I-fax documents in memory, and set the times for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.


Remark
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can receive I-faxes into memory.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, you can receive faxes into memory.


Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password

You can set a seven digit password for the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox, and restrict its use to only those users who know the password.


Remark
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Password].
  1. Press [Settings].
  1. Press [Password] → enter the desired password using - (numeric Keys).
  1. Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation using - (numeric Keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory

You can set the machine to store received fax documents in memory without printing them. This is referred to as Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Use Fax Memory Lock].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If the message <Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the Fax Memory Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See "Mail Box.")


Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory

You can set the machine to store received I-fax documents in memory without printing them. This is referred to as I-Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Use I-Fax Memory Lock].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the I-Fax Memory Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See "Mail Box.")


Memory Lock Start Time Settings

You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory Lock Start Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

  • Select a number ([1] to [5]) → enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

You can store up to five different start times.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) → select a number ([1] to [5]).

  • Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Press [OK].

If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See "Mail Box.")

  • You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.


Memory Lock End Time Settings

You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory Lock End Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].


  • Select a number ([1] to [5]) → enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].
    You can store up to five different start times.
    Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) → select a number ([1] to [5]).
  • Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].
    You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
    Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Press [OK].

If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See "Mail Box.")

  • You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.


Restricting the Send Function

You can set the Address Book with a password and set access numbers to restrict its use.



Address Book Password

You can set a password for the Address Book. If a password is set, restrictions can be placed on the registering, editing, and erasing of destinations.


Remark
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the Address Book password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Address Book Password].
  1. Press [Settings].
  1. Press [Password] → enter the desired password - (numeric Keys).
  1. Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set the Address Book with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Access Number Management

You can set an access number for an address in the Address Book to restrict access to that address, and this restricts other users who do not know the access number from viewing and utilizing these special addresses.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Access Number Management].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

If Access Number Management is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.



Restricting New Addresses

This mode enables you to restrict users from adding new destinations (fax, e-mail, I-fax, or file) to send to. The four types of new destinations can be restricted independently. The destination types you set to 'On' are grayed out so that they cannot be selected in [New Address] on the Send Basic Features screen. Setting this mode with an address book password enables only the following to be specified as destinations for the destination types in Restrict New Addresses set to 'On'.

  • Destinations stored in the Address Book
  • Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
  • User Inboxes
  • Destinations obtained by pressing one-touch buttons
  • Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
  • E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]

Remark
  • The following destinations cannot be edited if a destination type in Restrict New Addresses is set to 'On'
  • Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
  • Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
  • E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]
  • Destinations of a job that is canceled because of transmission errors, or a job that is waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses is set to 'On', all stored settings in the Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Restrict New Addresses].
  1. Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], or [File].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver

You can set whether to disable the sending of faxes using the fax driver.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Allow Fax Driver TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Faxes can be sent using the fax driver.
[Off]: Faxes cannot be sent using the fax driver.


Setting to Confirm Entered Fax Numbers

This mode displays a confirmation screen when a user enters a fax number, to prevent misdialing.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Confirm Entered Fax Number].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Displays a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.
[Off]: Does not display a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.


Restricting the Domains to Which E-mail/I-Fax Documents Can Be Sent

You can restrict the domains to which documents can be sent via e-mail or I-fax. If you restrict the domains for sending, you can send documents only to destinations which belong the specified domain.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction].
  1. Select [On] for <Restrict Sending to Domains>.

If you select [Off], proceed to step 4.


  1. Specify the domains to which you want to allow e-mail or I-fax documents to be sent.

  • Press [Register].
  • Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> → press [OK].

<Send to Subdomain>

[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
  • You can register up to three domains.

  • Select the desired registered domain → press [Edit].
  • Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> → press [OK].

<Send to Subdomain>

[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.

  • Select the domain that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • Press [Yes].

  1. Press [OK].


Allowing the Sending of PDF or XPS Documents With Expired Certificates

This mode enables you to set whether to allow the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set or the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Allow Sending with Expired Certificates].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Allows the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.


Setting to Always Add a Device Signature to PDF or XPS Documents

This mode enables you to set whether to always add a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Always Add Device Signature to Send].

  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Always adds a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.
[Off]: Does not add a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Restrict File Format> → press [OK].

    <Restrict File Format>:
[On]: Only PDF or XPS files can be sent.
[Off]: Files other than PDF or XPS can also be sent.
  • If <Restrict File Format> is set to 'On', and sending a file in a format other than PDF or XPS is registered in the Favorites Button, the file cannot be sent.

  • Press [OK].


Forwarding Settings

You can set the machine to store received fax/I-fax documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes, or forward them to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. You can also set a specified time during which received fax/I-fax documents which match the forwarding conditions are forwarded. This section explains the conditions for forwarding, and how to register, change, and erase forwarding destinations.

When the machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown below:

*1 Received I-fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*2 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional fax board is installed.
*3 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*4 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*5 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*6 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*7 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, they are printed after the paper jam is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*8 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*9 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
  • [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
  • [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned 'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*10 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*11 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
*12 The received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox the by specifying the Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.

Remark
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.


Storing Forwarding Settings

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Press [Register].

  1. To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that you have stored, press [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].

You can recall the last three forwarding settings.

  • The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Register screen or the Edit screen.
  • Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.
  • The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned OFF.
  • The forwarding settings of a received document that were not stored in memory are not displayed even when you press the recall keys.
  1. Press [Condition Name].
  1. Enter a name for the forwarding condition → press [OK].
  • If [Send Doc. Name] is not specified, the first 24 characters of the condition name are also stored as the document's name. However, you can change the document's name at any time.
  1. Press [Forwarding Conditions].
  1. Press the Receive Type drop-down list → select [Fax] or [I-Fax].

If either the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select the line ([Fax: Line Shared], [Fax: Line 1], [Fax: Line 2], or [Fax: Line 3]).


  1. Set the forwarding conditions.

  • Press the To, From, or Subject drop-down list.

The available forwarding conditions are:

[disregarded]: Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

[equals] is not an option for <To>.

  • Select the forwarding condition → press [Set.].
  • Enter the forwarding criterion → press [OK].
  • If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).

If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing the forwarding condition for the To, From, and Subject drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change → enter the new criteria → press [OK].

  • If [disregarded] is selected as the forwarding condition, you cannot enter any criteria.

  • Select the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password drop-down list.

The available forwarding conditions are:

[disregarded]: Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[does not exist]: The Subaddress or Password information does not exist for the received document.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

[does not exist] is not an option for <Fax Number >.

[does not exist] and [equals] are the only forwarding conditions that can be selected for <Subaddress> and <Password>.

  • Select the forwarding condition → press [Set.] → enter the forwarding criterion using - (numeric keys).

Details of each item are shown below.

[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
  • If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).

If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing the forwarding condition for the Fax Number, Subaddress, and Password drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change → enter the new criteria → press [OK].

If you select password as the forwarding conditions, press [Set.] → [Password] → enter a password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK].

You can enter up to 20 characters for the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password forwarding criteria. The characters that can be entered are:

  • Fax Number: 0 to 9, [Space], [+]
  • Subaddress: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
  • Password: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
  • If [disregarded] or [does not exist] is selected as the forwarding condition, you cannot enter any criteria.
  • You cannot set the following combinations of conditions.
Fax Number Subaddress Password
[disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals] [does not exist]
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as asterisks on Password screen, and you do not have to re-enter the password for confirmation. (See "Security.")

  1. Press [Done].

  1. Press [Forwarding Destination] → select [Address Book] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine (relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  • If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
  • A WebDAV server cannot be specified as a forwarding destination. If the selected destination is a group address which contains a WebDAV server, the document is not forwarded to the WebDAV server.

  • Select the forwarding destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and password registered in the Address Book are ignored.

  • Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox → press [OK].

You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.

If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send].

A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.

  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."

  1. Press [Send Doc. Name].

If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 13.

  1. Enter the name of the document → press [OK].

The condition name is automatically entered as the document's name by default. However, you can change this name.

  1. Press [Forwarding Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Period Specification], or [Off].
  • You cannot set the same time for both the start time and end time.

  • Enter the start time and end time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

  • If the end time is set earlier than the start time, the received documents will stop being forwarded at the specified end time on the following day.
    For example:
    Start time: 22:00, end time: 21:00
    The end time refers to 21:00 on the following day.

  • Press [Add].
  • Press the Start Time drop-down list → select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) at which to start forwarding.
  • Press [] next to the Start Time drop-down list → enter the time at which to start forwarding using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

If you press [All Day], the start and end times are automatically set to '00:00'. The day for the end time is automatically set to the day following the day for the start time.

  • Set the end time in the same way as the start time → press [OK].

You can store up to seven different combinations of start and end times.

To change previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to change → press [Edit].

To erase previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • If the end time is set earlier than the start time and both the start time and the end time are set for the same day of the week, the received documents will stop being forwarded at the specified end time on the specified day of the following week.
    For example:
    Start time: Monday 22:00, end time: Monday 21:00
    The end time refers to Monday 21:00 of the following week.

  • Press [OK].

  1. Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list → select [On] or [Off].

If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 19.

<Store/Print Received Doc.>:

[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off', the received document is printed. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  1. Press [Forwarding Done Notice] → select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs, press [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].

  1. Press [File Format] → select the file format of the document you want to forward → [OK].

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
  • A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination

File formats:

[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  1. Press [OK].
  • You cannot set multiple forwarding conditions that contain the same subaddress setting.
  1. If necessary, press the E-mail Priority drop-down list → select a priority for your forwarded e-mail messages.

This setting is necessary only if the forwarding destination is an e-mail address.



When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.


Remark
  • If the optional fax board is installed and the subaddress and password specified from the sending machine do not match the registered forwarding conditions, the documents are not forwarded to forwarding destinations registered in Forward w/o Conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the faxed documents are not received.
  • Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings] → [Forward w/o Conditions].
  1. Press the Receive Type drop-down list → select [Fax] or [I-Fax].

If either the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select the line ([Fax: Line 1], [Fax: Line 2], or [Fax: Line 3]).


  1. Press [Forwarding Destination] → select [Address Book] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine (relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  • If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
  • A WebDAV server cannot be specified as a forwarding destination. If the selected destination is a group address which contains a WebDAV server, the document is not forwarded to the WebDAV server.

  • Select the forwarding destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and password registered in the Address Book are ignored.

  • Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox → press [OK].

You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.

If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send].

A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.

  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."

  1. Press [Send Doc. Name].

If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 6.

  1. Enter the name of the document → press [OK].
  1. Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list → select [On] or [Off].

If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 11.

<Store/Print Received Doc.>:

[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off', the received document is printed. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  1. Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
  1. Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs, press [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].

  1. Press [File Format] → select the file format of the document you want to forward → [OK].

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
  • A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination

File formats:

[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  1. Press [OK].


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the forwarding setting whose details you want to check → press [Edit].
  1. Check or change the forwarding settings → press [OK].


Forwarding Received Documents

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the desired forwarding setting → press [Validate/Invalidate].

Details of each item are shown below.

<On>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
<Off>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.

To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.



Erasing Forwarding Settings

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the forwarding setting that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  1. Press [Yes].


Printing Forwarding Settings

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Press [Print List].
  • The forwarding settings can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


LDAP Server Settings

If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses and fax numbers via the LDAP server. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
  • Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
  • Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
  • Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
    For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • You can register up to five LDAP servers.


Registering an LDAP Server

You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server name and address.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server] → [Register].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Next].

[Server Name]:

Enter a server name → press [OK].

[Server Address]:

Press [Server Address] → enter the server's address → press [OK].

[Location to Start Search]:

Press [Location to Start Search] → enter the location to start searching → press [OK].

If the server's LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].

Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as described below.

  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
    Add "DC=" to each dot separated series of characters in the Active Directory domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active Directory:
    DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
  • If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
    Add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
    ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as "ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".

<Use SSL>:

[On]: SSL is used. Using SSL encodes the content of the communication, and ensures greater security.
[Off]: SSL is not used.

<Port Number>:

Press [Port Number] → enter a port number using - (numeric keys).

<Max. No. of Addresses to Search>:

Press [Max. No. of Addresses to Search] → enter the maximum number of addresses to search using - (numeric keys).

<Search Timeout>:

Press [Search Timeout] → enter the timeout time, in seconds, using - (numeric keys).

  • If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, enter a host name instead of an IP address.

  1. Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login Information>.
  • [Use (security auth.)] next to <Login Information> can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory.
  • If you entered an IP address in step 2, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not use] or [Use].
  • If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)', and if Date & Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server, the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP server.

  • Select the Server LDAP version and character code → press [OK].

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter a user name → press [OK].

Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using.

  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
    Press [User] → enter "Windows domain name/Windows user name".
    Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the Windows user name:
    team1/user1
  • If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
    Press [User] → add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
    cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Press [User] → enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as "cn=admin", "ou=team1", or "ou=salesdept".

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK] → [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Register screen.

<Display authentication dialog when searching>:

[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.

<Server LDAP version and character code>:

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter a user name → press [OK].

Example: If <user1 > is the Windows user name:
user1

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Register screen.

[Domain Name]:

Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].

Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.

<Display authentication dialog when searching>:

[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Password screen. (See "Security.")


Changing an LDAP Server Setting

You can change the settings for a stored LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change → press [Edit].
  1. Change the necessary settings → press [Next].
  1. Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login Information> → change the settings for the selected mode → press [OK].


Deleting an LDAP Server

You can delete a stored LDAP server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Select the LDAP server that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  1. Press [Yes].


Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes

You can register or edit the LDAP search attributes.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server] → [Register/Edit LDAP Search].

  1. Register/edit the LDAP search attributes.


  • Press [Not Reg'd 1] or [Not Reg'd 2] → [Register/Edit].
  • Press [Display Name] → enter the name to display → press [OK].
  • Press [Attribute Name] → enter the attribute name → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].

  • Select the search attribute that you want to edit → press [Register/Edit].
  • You can only edit the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default. You cannot edit the name, e-mail, fax, organization, and organization unit attributes.
  • Press [Display Name] → enter the name to display → press [OK].
  • Press [Attribute Name] → enter the attribute name → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].

  • Select the search category that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • You can only erase the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default. You cannot erase the Name, E-mail, Fax, Organization, and OrganizationUnit attributes.
  • Press [Yes].


Printing LDAP Server Settings

You can print the LDAP server settings.


Remark
  • For more information on the Registered LDAP Server List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Press [Print List].
  • The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Erasing All Encrypted PDF Password

When changing the authentication system if an SSO-H login service is specified, it is necessary to erase the encrypted PDF passwords that are stored for each user. Using this function, all of the encrypted PDF passwords are erased.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated, and you are using SSO-H login services. For information on SSO-H login services, see "Security."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Erase All Encrypted PDF Password].
  1. Press [Yes].


Report Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Report Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


  • Settings
Item Settings Delivered
Send
TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

(Not Selected*1)
Fax*2
Fax TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Fax Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

(Not Selected*1)
Fax RX Report For Error Only, On, Off*1 Yes
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report On*1, Off Yes

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Print List
Item Settings Delivered
Send
Address Book List Address Book 1 to 10, One-touch Buttons
Print List: Print
No
User's Data List Print List No
Fax*2
User's Data List Print List No

*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.

Remark
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Specifying Report Settings

You can specify how various reports are printed.


Remark
  • The reports can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")


Send TX Report

The Send TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly to their intended destinations. A Send TX Report can be printed automatically after the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Send TX Report only when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Send TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the document's contents.


Remark
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, the results of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmissions are printed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, the results of fax and User Inbox transmissions are included in the Send TX Report. In addition, a Fax TX Report is printed with the Send TX Report, if Fax TX Report in Fax under <Settings> in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.)
  • For an example of a Send TX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Settings> → [TX Report].

  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Send TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Send TX Report.
  • Even if <Report with TX Image> is set to 'On', the original will not be printed if the document was sent using the Encrypted PDF mode.

  • Press [OK].

The Send TX Report is not printed.



Activity Report

The Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. The Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.

An Activity Report can be printed manually from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log" and "Printing the Receive Job Log.")


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Activity Report] is not displayed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
  • Auto Print
  • Daily Activity Report Time
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, a list of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmission logs is printed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, a list of fax and the User Inbox transmission logs are printed.
  • For an example of an Activity Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Settings> → [Activity Report].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Auto Print>:

[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.

<Daily Activity Report Time>:

[On]: The Daily Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.

If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 100 before the specified time, an Activity Report of the most recent 100 transmissions is printed.

<Send/Receive Separate>:

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.

If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].



Fax TX Report

The Fax TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly to their intended destinations. A Fax TX Report can be printed automatically after the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Fax TX Report only when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Fax TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the document's contents.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If TX Report in Send under <Settings> in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On', a Send TX Report is printed with the Fax TX Report.
  • If a sequential broadcast transmission is performed when Fax TX Report is set to On, a Fax Multi TX Report is printed.
  • For an example of a Fax TX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax TX Report].

  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image> → press [OK].

<Report with TX Image>:

[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Fax TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Fax TX Report.

  • Press [OK].

The Fax TX Report is not printed.



Fax Activity Report

The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. The Fax Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.

A copy of the Fax Activity Report can be printed at any time from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Fax Activity Report."


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Fax Activity Report] is not displayed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
  • Auto Print
  • Daily Activity Report Time
  • For an example of a Fax Activity Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax Activity Report].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Auto Print>:

[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40.

<Daily Activity Report Time>:

[On]: The Fax Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
23:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.

If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 40 before the specified time, a Fax Activity Report of the most recent 40 transmissions is printed.

<Send/Receive Separate>:

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.

If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].



Fax RX Report

The Fax RX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly from the sender's machine and received successfully by this machine. A Fax RX Report can be printed automatically after documents are received, and you can also set the machine to print a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • For an example of a Fax RX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax RX Report].
  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[For Error Only]: Prints a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.
[On]: Prints a Fax RX Report each time a document is received.
[Off]: Does not print a Fax RX Report.


Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report

The Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report enables you to check the reception of documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • For an example of a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Printing Lists

You can print the contents of the Address Book or a list of Send settings that have been specified from the Additional Functions screen.


Remark
  • The lists can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")


Address Book List

You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons). This is useful for checking the details of the destinations.


Remark
  • Even if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all of the destinations in the selected subaddress book (including those stored with Access numbers) are printed in the Address Book list.
  • For an example of an Address Book List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Print List> → [Address Book List].
  1. Select one of the subaddress books 1 to 10 or [One-touch Buttons] → press [Print List].
  1. Press [Yes].


User's Data List

You can print a list of Send or Fax settings that have been specified from the Additional Functions screen. This is useful for checking the details of the settings.


Remark
  • The following two types of User's Data Lists are available:
  • Send: Prints all information related to the Send function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
  • Fax: Prints all information related to the Fax function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
  • For an example of the User's Data List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.


Printing the User's Data List for send

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Print List> → [User's Data List].
  1. Press [Yes].


Printing the User's Data List for fax

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Print List> → [User's Data List].
  1. Press [Yes].


When Problems Occur


Sending Documents

Canceling transmissions.

Document cannot be sent.

Document cannot be sent (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

Document cannot be sent (if the optional fax board is installed).

Memory is full.

The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.

The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.

The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional fax board is installed).

The remote machine is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if the optional fax board is installed).

Canceling transmissions.

How do you cancel a transmission while a document is being scanned?

Press (Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel display.

How do you cancel a transmission after the document has been scanned?

If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax, press [System Monitor] → [Send] → [Status] → select the document that you want to cancel → press [Cancel] → [Yes]. However, documents that are being sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")

If you are sending the document by fax, press [System Monitor] → [Fax] → [Send Job Status] → select the document that you want to cancel → press [Cancel] → [Yes]. However, documents that are being sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")

Are you sending a fax document using the Direct Sending mode?

Press (Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel display.

Document cannot be sent.

Is the destination setting correct?

Check the destination setting of the recipient.

Is the destination stored in the Address Book correct?

Check the destination in the Address Book. (See "Editing Address Details.")

Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?

Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see whether the machine is turned OFF, is out of recording paper, or has insufficient available memory.

Document cannot be sent (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

If you are sending an e-mail message or I-fax, are the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings correct?

Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.

If you are sending to a file server, are the User and Password settings correct?

Check the User and Password settings, and send the document again.

If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?

Check the shared folder settings. (See "Network.")

Document cannot be sent (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the telephone line type set correctly?

Check the type of telephone line that has been set. (See "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line.")

If you are sending with a subaddress setting, did you enter the correct subaddress and password for the destination?

Check the subaddress and password settings.

Is the line connected to a private branch exchange switchboard or terminal adapter?

Set Check Dial Tone Before Sending in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Checking the Dial Tone before Sending.")

Memory is full.

Are unwanted documents stored in memory?

Check the TX Document and RX Document memory, and erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.

Is the platen glass clean?

Use your machine to make a copy of the document, and check it for streaks. If streaks appear, clean the platen glass. (See "Maintenance,")

The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.

Is the Exposure setting set towards '' (Light) and the Original Type setting set to 'Photo'?

Change the Exposure setting to '' (Dark) and the Original Type setting to 'Text'. Try sending the document again. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional fax board is installed).

Are the subaddress and password of the remote machine specified correctly?

Check to see if the machine has a subaddress function.

Check with the remote party to see if the specified subaddress and the RX password at both this machine and the remote machine are the same.

Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?

Check to make sure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see whether the recipient's machine has been turned OFF, is out of recording paper, or has insufficient available memory.

Are the subaddress and password for the destination stored in the Address Book correct?

Check the subaddress and password settings for the destination stored in the Address Book.

The remote machine is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

If you are sending to a machine that is slow in switching over to fax receiving, insert a pause after the destination's fax number.



Receiving Documents

The machine does not receive documents.

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional fax board is installed).

Documents cannot be received in Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Documents cannot be received in memory.

The quality of printed originals is uneven.

The machine does not receive documents.

Does the machine have sufficient memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

Are network settings specified?

Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not specified. Confirm this with your System Manager.

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the RX password set in your machine?

If Receive Password is set in Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), documents can be received only from senders that use the correct password. Confirm this with your System Manager. (See "Fax Settings.")

Documents cannot be received in Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Are the forwarding conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set correctly?

Check the Forwarding Conditions, and inform the sender of those settings. (See "Forwarding Settings.")

Is Forwarding Settings set to 'On' using [Validate/Invalidate]?

Forwarding Settings must be set to 'On' to be effective. (See "Forwarding Settings.")

Is there sufficient available memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Erase unnecessary documents from the Confidential Fax Inboxes. (See "Erasing Received Documents.")

Documents cannot be received in memory.

Is there sufficient available memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Erase unwanted documents from the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents.")

The quality of printed originals is uneven.

Is the platen glass of the sender's machine clean?

Make a few copies using your machine. If the copies are not streaked, the problem is in the sending party's machine. Contact the sender and ask them to send the document again.



Other Situations

Transmissions are slow.

Fax transmissions are slow (if the optional fax board is installed).

Cannot use fax information services (if the optional fax board is installed).

Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional fax board is installed).

Calls are not connected, or an incorrect number is dialed.

Transmissions are slow.

Are documents being sent at a high resolution?

It is recommended that you send documents containing text only in a lower resolution.

Fax transmissions are slow (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the ECM TX or ECM RX set to 'On'?

Set ECM TX and ECM RX to 'Off'. (See "ECM Transmission" and "ECM Reception.")

Was the original type set to 'Text/Photo' when sending the document?

Select 'Text' from the Original Type drop-down list if the original does not contain any photos. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

Cannot use fax information services (if the optional fax board is installed).

If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line, is your machine set for tone dialing?

Set the machine for tone dialing to use fax information services. (See "Fax Information Services.")

Did you receive an instruction from the sender to set the machine to receive?

Press [RX Start]. (See "Fax Information Services.")

Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient, and then dial the number again. (See "Specifying a Fax Number.")

Change the Long Distance setting on the Option screen if you are sending documents to destinations stored in the Address Book. To access the Long Distance setting, press → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address] → [Fax] → [Option]. (See "Editing Address Details.")

Calls are not connected, or an incorrect number is dialed.

Did you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number?

Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.



Error Messages

This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display, along with possible causes and remedies.

For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see "Problem Solving" and "Network."



Self-Diagnostic Display

Perform the necessary procedures according to the displayed self-diagnostic error message.

Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following times:

  • When scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or printing
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network

The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible causes and remedies.


Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Set the IP Address.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

There are too many subdirectories.

No response.

Check the TCP/IP.

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Check the user name and password or check settings.

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.

Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Cause

You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of TCP/IP resources because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent via FTP or Windows (SMB).

Remedy

Wait for a while, and try browsing again.

Set the IP Address.

Cause

This machine is not set with an IP address.

Remedy

Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), turn the machine's main power OFF, and then back ON.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

Cause

The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low.

Remedy

Wait for a while, and then try browsing again. If there is still no response from the server, try selecting another server.

NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Cause

You cannot browse the network because NetWare is printing through a PServer or NDS PServer.

Remedy

Wait until printing is complete, and then try browsing again.

There are too many subdirectories.

Cause

You have exceeded the maximum number of subdirectory levels allowed.

Remedy

Specify a different destination because the directory level that you are trying to access cannot be specified.

No response.

Cause 1

The server was not running when you tried to send.

Remedy

Make sure that the server is ON, and check the destination.

Cause 2

The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination, or the connection was lost before the job could be completed.)

Remedy

Check the status of the network.

Cause 3

You tried to send via NetWare, but the Tree name was not entered.

Remedy

Enter the Tree name.

Cause 4

A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy

Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.

Check the TCP/IP.

Cause

The machine's TCP/IP connection is not operating.

Remedy

Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause 1

The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.

Remedy 1

Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy 2

Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are correct.

Cause 2

If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, the machine will not be able to determine the host name.

Remedy

Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause

The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.

Remedy 1

Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy 2

Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Remedy 3

Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally.

Remedy 4

If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter.

Check the user name and password or check settings.

Cause 1

When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)', the user name or password is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the User Name and Password settings when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Cause 2

When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the Domain Name setting when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

Cause

The search could not be completed within the time specified under <Search Timeout>.

Remedy

Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.

Cause

The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search.

Remedy 1

Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.

Remedy 2

Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Cause 1

"\" is used in the search criterion.

Remedy

Remove "\" from the search criterion, and then search again.

Cause 2

The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion.

  • There is an unequal number of "("and")".
  • "*" is not placed within "( )".
Remedy

Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and then search again.

Cause 3

If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to 'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used.

Remedy

Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.

Cause

Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server is running on version 2.

Remedy

Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")



List of Error Codes without Messages

If an error occurs while a document is being sent or received, an error code is displayed on the job log in the System Monitor screen, and is included in various reports. Check what the error code is, and then take the required steps to solve the problem. (See Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.)


Remark
  • If a send job is canceled, <STOP> is printed in the Results column on the Send report.

#001

#003

#005

#009

#011

#012

#018

#022

#037

#080

#081

#102

#107

#701

#702

#703

#704

#705

#706

#711

#712

#713

#751

#752

#753

#754

#755

#756

#761

#762

#766

#770

#801

#802

#803

#804

#806

#810

#815

#818

#819

#820

#821

#822

#827

#828

#829

#830

#831

#832

#833

#834

#835

#837

#839

#841

#842

#843

#847

#851

#852

#859

#868

#869

#870

#871

#872

#873

#874

#875

#876

#877

#878

#879

#880

#881

#882

#883

#884

#885

#886

#899

#995

#001

Cause 1

Different sized originals were scanned without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

Cause 2

Different sized originals were scanned in the 2-Sided Original without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

#003

Cause 1

Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.

Remedy1

Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then try sending the document again. (See "Resolution.")

Remedy2

When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it.

#005

Cause 1

The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 2

The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.

Remedy

Check the type of machine that the recipient has.

#009

Cause 1

There is no paper.

Remedy

Load paper. (See "Maintenance,")

Cause 2

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.

Remedy

Insert the paper drawer properly. (See "Maintenance,")

#011

Cause 1

The document that you are sending is not placed correctly.

Remedy

Place the document properly into the feeder or on the platen glass, and try sending again.

#012

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of paper.

Remedy

Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine.

#018

Cause 1

The recipient's machine did not respond when your machine redialed.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 2

The documents could not be sent because the recipient's machine was performing another task.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 3

The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipient's machine, and that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and try again.

#022

Cause 1

Forwarding could not be performed because all of the addresses stored in the specified group destination have been deleted, or a User Inbox is specified as the group destination.

Remedy

Re-enter the group destination, and try sending again.

Cause 2

When transmitting to a destination stored in the Address Book, transmission could not be performed because the specified destination stored in the Address Book was deleted while the documents were waiting to be sent.

Remedy

Re-enter the destination in the Address Book, and try sending again.

Cause 3

Transmission via fax driver is not allowed.

Remedy

Allow Fax Driver TX in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. Set Allow Fax Driver TX to 'On'. (See, "Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver.")

Cause 4

Forwarding could not be performed because a group address that includes a destination using WebDAV is selected as the forwarding destination.

Remedy

Specify a forwarding destination that does not use WebDAV.

#037

Cause 1

Transmission via fax driver is not allowed.

Remedy

Allow Fax Driver TX in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. Set Allow Fax Driver TX to 'On'. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Cause 2

Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

Remedy

This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining page.

#080

Cause 1

A subaddress is not set in the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Try sending the document without a subaddress, or request that the recipient set the same subaddress as the sender's subaddress.

#081

Cause 1

A password is not set in the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Try sending the document without a password, or request that the recipient set the same password as the sender's password.

#102

Cause 1

The subaddress and/or password do not match.

Remedy

Check the subaddress and/or password of the recipient's machine, make sure that the subaddress and password you are sending with the document matches the recipient's, and then try again.

#107

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory available.

Remedy1

Resend the document at a lower resolution.

Remedy2

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors to make more memory available. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Remedy3

If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

#701

Cause 1

The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.

Remedy

Enter the correct Department ID or password using - (numeric keys) on the control panel, and then try sending again.

Cause 2

The Department ID or password was changed during the job.

Remedy

Try performing the job again with the new Department ID and password. If you do not know the password, contact your System Manager.

Cause 3

<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Set <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Security.")

#702

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because the memory is full.

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs are complete.

Remedy2

Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Send the document to a smaller number of recipients.

#703

Cause 1

The memory for the image data is full.

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs are complete.

Remedy2

Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#704

Cause 1

An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book.

Remedy

Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#705

Cause 1

The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax, decrease the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending limit. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.") Depending on the destination conditions, it may be possible to divide the data.

#706

Cause 1

The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is being used by another sending component.

Remedy

Wait until the Address Book Import/Export function from the Remote UI or the other sending component is complete, and then try sending again.

#711

Cause 1

The inbox memory is full.

Remedy

Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#712

Cause 1

The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.

Remedy

Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#713

Cause 1

The document in the inbox was deleted before its link was sent via e-mail.

Remedy

Store the necessary document in the inbox again, and then try to send the link via e-mail.

#751

Cause 1

The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).

Remedy

Check the recipient's address. Check that the network is up.

#752

Cause 1

The server is not functioning. The network is down.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is operating properly. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct. The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.

Remedy

Check the SMTP Server name, domain name, and E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#753

Cause 1

A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Remedy

Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#754

Cause 1

The server is not functioning or the network is down. The destination setting is not correct.

Remedy

Check the server and network. Check the destination's address settings.

#755

Cause 1

You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cause 2

The IP address is not set.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cause 3

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#756

Cause 1

NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Turn NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) 'On'. (See "Network.")

#761

Cause 1

A PDF or XPS file with a digital signature could not be sent because a digital certificate or key pair registered in the machine is corrupt or could not be accessed.

Remedy1

If you are sending a PDF or XPS file with a user signature, confirm that the user certificate is not corrupt. If the user certificate is corrupt, re-install it. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

If you are sending a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, confirm that the device certificate is not corrupt. If the device certificate is corrupt, generate it again. (See "Network.)

#762

Cause 1

Could not send to a domain that is not registered as an allowed domain because E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'.

Remedy1

Try sending again after setting E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction to 'Off', or registering the domain as an allowed domain.

#766

Cause 1

The certificate used to send a PDF or XPS with a digital signature has expired.

Remedy1

Update the certificate, or use a certificate which has not expired.

Remedy2

Set the date and time of the machine to the correct date and time. (See "Setting the Current Date and Time.")

#770

Cause 1

Data could not be sent with WebDAV, because the WebDAV server or proxy server does not support SSL communications.

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the proxy server if you are communicating via a proxy server.

#801

Cause 1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message or send/receive an I-fax.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.

Cause 3

You are sending a file to a destination to which you have no write permission.

Remedy

Check the destination setting.

Cause 4

When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file with the same name already exists on the FTP server and that file cannot be overwritten.

Remedy

Change the settings on the file server to enable the file to be overwritten, or contact the server administrator.

Cause 5

When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either the folder name is incorrectly specified or the password is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the destination setting.

#802

Cause 1

The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Connection to the DNS server failed.

Remedy

Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check the DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

#803

Cause 1

The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient's side before all of the pages could be sent.

Remedy

Try sending again.

#804

Cause 1

Unable to match the specified directory name when sending data to a file server.

Remedy

Check the destination.

Cause 2

You have no permission to access the folder.

Remedy

Change the settings on the file server to enable access to the folder, or contact the server administrator.

#806

Cause 1

An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server.

Remedy

Change the user name or password.

Cause 2

An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy

Check the e-mail or I-fax address.

#810

Cause 1

A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The POP server returned an error during the connection.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 3

A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

#815

Cause 1

You cannot log on to the file server because the machine is printing a document sent to that server. Simultaneous connections are not possible.

Remedy

Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again, or change the NetWare server to which you are sending your documents. Alternatively, stop the PServer.

#818

Cause 1

The received data is not in a printable file format.

Remedy

Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data.

#819

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#820

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#821

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#822

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (image data cannot be decoded).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#827

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#828

Cause 1

You have received HTML data.

Remedy

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.

#829

Cause 1

Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

Remedy

This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

#830

Cause 1

A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because the data size of the sent documents exceeds the mail server capacity.

Remedy1

Check the I-fax address or destination setting.

Remedy2

Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less than the mail server capability. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")

Remedy3

Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and network.

#831

Cause 1

An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP because of the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#832

Cause 1

DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/ I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the mail server.

Remedy1

Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/ I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

#833

Cause 1

MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the mail server.

Remedy1

Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

#834

Cause 1

An MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because trouble has occurred in the network or mail server. Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is full.

Remedy

Check the I-fax address and destination settings.

#835

Cause 1

The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax has been exceeded.

Remedy

Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document, and then resend the data.

#837

Cause 1

A connection request was received from a host whose connection is restricted by IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Make sure that the connection request is made from an authorized host.

#839

Cause 1

The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the user name and password for SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#841

Cause 1

The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server does not exist for sending e-mail or I-fax.

Remedy1

Set Allow SSL in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server in the mail server settings.

#842

Cause 1

Authentication using the client certificate was requested by the mail server for sending an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy1

Set Allow SSL in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Change the mail server settings so that the client certificate is not requested.

#843

Cause 1

There is large difference between the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the time set in the machine.

Remedy1

Change the current date and time in Date & Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Setting the Current Date and Time.")

Remedy2

Change the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server.

#847

Cause 1

Could not save the received document in the Confidential Fax Inbox, as the memory of the Confidential Fax Inbox is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#851

Cause 1

There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.

Remedy

Check the system's available memory, and delete unnecessary documents in the inboxes. (See "Mail Box.")

Cause 2

The memory for image data is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents to make more memory available. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Cause 3

The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 2,000 documents in the specified inbox.

Remedy

Delete unnecessary documents from the specified inbox. (See "Mail Box.")

#852

Cause 1

An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.

Remedy

Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if necessary. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#859

Cause 1

A compression error occurred with the image data.

Remedy

Check the print settings, and try printing again.

Cause 2

An original was not scanned properly, or the orientation of the original was incorrect.

Remedy

Check the scan settings, and try scanning again.

#868

Cause 1

Failed to communicate with the destination when sending with WebDAV, because access via a proxy server was requested (received HTTP Error 305: Use Proxy).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#869

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that authorization failed when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 401: Unauthorized).

Remedy1

Check the user name and password for the destination.

Remedy2

Check the security settings of the WebDAV server.

#870

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the request was denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 403: Forbidden).

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again.

Remedy2

Check the destination.

Remedy3

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#871

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the specified folder could not be found when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 404: Not Found/409: Conflict/410: Gone).

Remedy

Check the destination.

#872

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that access is denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 405: Method Not Allowed).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#873

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that proxy authentication failed when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 407: Proxy Authentication Required).

Remedy

Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#874

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the connection timed out when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 408: Request Timeout).

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#875

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that chunked encoding was denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 411: Length Required).

Remedy1

Set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

Remedy2

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#876

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the size of the data was too large when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 413: Request Entity Too Large).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#877

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the URI (host name + folder path) was too long when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 414: Request-URI Too Long).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#878

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server encountered an unexpected condition that prevented it from executing the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 500: Internal Server Error).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#879

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 501: Not Implemented).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

#880

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 502: Bad Gateway).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#881

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server could not handle the current request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 503: Service Unavailable).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#882

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 504: Gateway Timeout).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#883

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 505: HTTP Version Not Supported).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#884

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not have sufficient free disk space to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 507: Insufficient Storage).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#885

Cause 1

An unexpected error occurred when sending with WebDAV.

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#886

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the request was invalid when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 400: Bad Request).

Remedy

If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

#899

Cause 1

The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be incomplete because the transmission was relayed via multiple servers.

Remedy1

Confirm whether reception was completed.

Remedy2

Check if you received an error notification.

#995

Cause 1

Reserved communication jobs were cleared.

Remedy

Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.



Questions & Answers

Can the machine automatically resend documents when there are errors in transmission?

If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax, specify Retry Times in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Number of Retry Attempts.")

If you are sending the document by fax, set Auto Redial in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). You can also make detailed settings, such as the redialing frequency and interval. (See "Auto Redial.")

What happens to documents that are sent to my machine while the power switch on the control panel is turned OFF?

These documents are automatically stored and printed when all documents have been received.

What happens if fax/I-fax documents arrive when the machine is being used for copying?

While you are making copies, the documents are automatically received and stored in the machine's memory, and will be printed automatically when you finish copying.

You can change the order in which these documents print. (See "Additional Functions.")

I frequently send documents using the same settings. Can the machine be set to automatically restore those settings when the power is turned ON or after an operation completes?

You can store the desired settings in a favorites button and recall them as needed. Alternatively, you can set the desired settings as the Standard Send Settings so that they are always specified when the machine is turned ON or after an operation completes.

What happens to received documents if a paper jam occurs while they are printing?

If documents are not printed correctly, they are held in memory. When the paper jam is cleared, printing resumes from the page at which the paper jam occurred.

What happens to a document that has not been completely received when a blackout occurs?

The document, up to the last page that was successfully received, is printed.

What happens to documents in memory and the memory settings if power is interrupted?

Documents that are stored in the system's memory remain in memory even when power to the machine is interrupted. Similarly, the contents of the Address Book are also stored permanently in memory. However, if power is interrupted while a document is being received, it is not stored in memory. After the power is restored, the sender or mail server may resend the interrupted job. If the interrupted job was sent from a POP server as I-fax, since the job is stored in the POP server, the machine can receive it again.

How can I save paper?

You can set for received documents to be printed on both sides of the paper. (See "2-Sided Printing.")

You can set for received documents to be forwarded to e-mail destinations, or receive documents in memory, and then send them to the desired destinations. (See "Forwarding Settings" and "Mail Box."

You can set the machine to not print reports. Two kinds of reports are printed when an error occurs while sending a fax, the Send TX Report and Fax TX Report. You can save paper by setting the machine to not print either one of these reports. (See "Specifying Report Settings.")

Can I turn the machine's power OFF if a document is set with the Delayed Send setting?

When you are not using the machine, you may turn OFF the control panel power switch on the control panel, but leave the main power switch turned ON. Documents that are set with the Delayed Send setting are automatically sent from memory when the specified time arrives.

Can I change the data size of an e-mail message or I-fax before sending it?

You can specify the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting according to your needs. To access this setting, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. For e-mail, the send job is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent, so that the data size of each e-mail message does not exceed the set limit. For I-fax, the send job cannot be sent if the data size exceeds the set limit when Send Via Server setting is set to 'On'. However, when Send Via Server setting is set to 'Off', even if you enter the maximum data size for sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.

The result in the Activity Report shows "--." How can I tell if the document was successfully sent?

"--" is displayed when sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail message or I-fax you sent, or the file that you sent to an iW folder, was actually delivered. Contact the recipient to check whether your document was received.